牛津初中英语七九年级知识梳理

牛津初中英语七九年级知识梳理

牛津版初中英语七-九年级知识梳理 ‎ 7A Unit 1 知识梳理 ‎ 一. 重点单词。‎ A.四会单词。‎ ‎1.year n. 年;岁 2.grade n. 年级 3.reading n. 阅读 4.club n. 兴趣小组 ‎ ‎5.after prep. 在…之后 6.long adj. 长的 7.music n. 音乐 8.hard adv/adj 努力地;困难的 9.short adj. 短的 10.swimming n. 游泳 11.wear v. 戴 12.glasses n. 眼镜(复数) ‎ ‎13.enjoy v.喜欢 14.volleyball n. 排球 15.swim v. 游泳 16.eat v. 吃 ‎17.fish n.鱼 18.Maths n 数学 19.walk v/n 散步 20.fly v. 飞 ‎ ‎21.lunchtime n. 午餐时间 22.every adj. 每个的 23.day n. 天 24.drawing n. 绘画 ‎ ‎25.always adv. 总是 26.weekend n. 周末 27.usually adv. 通常 28.run v. 跑 ‎ ‎29.hour n. 小时 30.sometimes adv. 有时 31.often adv. 经常 32.dinner n. 正餐 ‎ ‎33.grandparent n. 祖父母 34.restaurant n. 餐馆 35.news 新闻 36.player n. 运动员 ‎37.team n. 队 38.goal n. 得分 39.next adj. 下一个的 40.age n. 年龄 ‎41.match n.比赛 42.well adj. 身体好的 43.strong adj. 强壮的 44.rubber n. 橡皮 ‎45.borrow v. 借 46.say v. 说 47.start v.开始 48.begin v. 开始 ‎49.lesson n. 功课 50.sport n. 体育 51. someone pron. 某人 52.great adj. 好极的 B．词形变换。‎ ‎1. slim---slimmer---slimmest 2. wear---wore---worn 3. hobby---hobbies ‎4.run---running---ran---run 5. win---winning---won---won 6. match---matches ‎7.say---said---said 8.understand---understood---understood ‎ ‎9. begin---beginning---began---begun 10.eat---ate---eaten 11.fly---flew---flown 二．重点词组。‎ ‎1.read an instruction book 读一个说明书 ‎ ‎2.be clever at swimming=be good at swimming 擅长于游泳 ‎3.have a Maths lesson 上一节数学课 ‎ ‎4.come from=be from 来自于 ‎5.like/enjoy/love listening to music 喜欢听音乐 ‎ ‎6.work/study hard 努力学习 ‎7.wear glasses 戴眼镜 ‎ ‎8.play tennis with a tennis racket 用一个网球拍打网球 ‎9.play football in the football field 在足球场踢足球 ‎ ‎10.eat some snacks 吃些零食 ‎11.have a walk/take…for a walk 去散步 ‎ ‎12.walk to school/walk home 步行上学/回家 ‎13.the best team in the world世界上最好的队 ‎ ‎14.play tennis after school 放学后打网球 ‎15.be a member of the Reading Club 阅读俱乐部的一个成员 ‎ ‎16.at the weekend 在周末 ‎17.go running for half an hour 跑半个小时 ‎18.an hour/one and a half hours=one hour and a half 一个半小时 ‎19.have a big dinner in a restaurant 在一家餐馆吃顿大餐 ‎ ‎20.sports news 体育新闻 ‎21.watch a badminton match 观看一场羽毛球比赛 ‎ ‎22.in the next World Cup 在下届世界杯上 ‎23.borrow a rubber from your classmate 从你的同学那借一个橡皮 ‎24.say it in English/speak English 用英语说 ‎25.start/begin to learn English=start/begin learning English 开始学英语 ‎26.dark/light blue 深蓝/浅蓝 ‎27.talk with sb. on the phone/by phone 和某人在电话里谈话 ‎28.look for things on the Internet 在网上搜寻东西 ‎29.want to be a computer programmer 想成为电脑程序员 ‎ ‎30.grow up 成长 ‎31.help each other/talk with each other 互相帮助/互相谈话 ‎32.in the Dancing Club 在舞蹈俱乐部 ‎33.look at the three profiles of my classmates 看我同学们的三个简历 ‎34.talk to my classmates at lunchtime 在午餐时和同学谈话 ‎35.have dinner at my grandparents’ home 在我祖父母家吃饭 ‎36.Simon’s favourite football player 西蒙最爱的足球运动员 ‎37.the newest member of the Computer Club 电脑俱乐部最新成员 ‎38.play for Huanghe Football Team 效力于黄河足球队 ‎39.the answer to the question 问题的答案 ‎ ‎40.be born 出生 ‎41.in the Reading Club 在阅读兴趣小组 ‎ ‎42.want to do sth. 想要做某事 ‎43.take my dog for a walk 遛狗 ‎ ‎44.talk on the phone with my friends 与朋友在电话号码里聊天 三．重点句子。‎ ‎★1.How to look after your e-dog? 怎样照料你的电子狗？‎ look after的意思是“照顾，照料”，相当于take care of 。如：‎ Look! Millie is looking after her mother. 看！米莉正在照顾她的妈妈。‎ ‎★2.Making friends at your new school. 在你的新学校交朋友。‎ make friends 意思是“交朋友”，与某人交朋友应表达为：make friends with sb. 如：‎ I find it easy to make friends with foreign students. 我发现与外国学生交朋友很容易。‎ ‎★3.He is very clever at Maths. 他学数学有天分。‎ be clever at 的意思是“在……方面聪明/有天分”类似的结构还有：be good at , do well in“擅长于……”，at 和 in 介词，后面应加名词或动名词形式(-ing形式)。 如：‎ I am good at football. = I am good at playing football. 我擅长踢足球。 ‎ ‎★4.My parents come from Shanghai. 我父母来自上海。‎ come from 的意思是“来自……（地方）；是……（地方）人”，也可以用be from 来表达。如: Simon comes from England. =Simon is from England 西蒙来自英国。‎ ‎★5.I was born there but we live in Beijing now. 我出生在那儿，但我们现在住在北京。‎ be born 意为“出生于……”后面可以加时间，也可以加地点。还要注意的是，表示某人出生一般都用过去时：was/ were born, 如： I was born in Nanjing. 我出生于南京。‎ ‎★6.I like listening to music. 我喜欢听音乐。‎ 表示“喜欢做某事”，我们可用like doing/to do sth, love doing/to do sth, enjoy doing sth,如：I like/love/enjoy reading.我喜欢看书。‎ ‎★7.She works hard. 她学习努力。‎ ‎*work hard “努力工作；努力学习”, “hard”在这里是副词“努力地，辛苦地”之意。若表示“努力学习……”，则加介词 “at”或 “on”, 即“work hard at/on sth.” 如：‎ We must work hard on/at English. 我们一定要努力学习英语。‎ ‎*hard 作副词还有“猛烈地”之意。如：It often rains hard in summer. 夏天雨经常下得很猛烈。‎ ‎*hard也可作形容词，意为“困难的；坚硬的”。如：‎ This is a hard question. 这是一个难题。/The stone feels hard. 石头摸上去感觉很坚硬。‎ ‎★8.He wears glasses.他戴着眼镜。‎ glass 可以指“玻璃”（不可数名词）、“玻璃杯”（可数名词）、“眼镜”（常用作复数glasses）。如：(a) There are four glasses on the table.桌上有四只玻璃杯。‎ ‎（b）Kitty does not wear glasses. 基蒂不戴眼镜。‎ ‎（c）This tea table is made of glass. 这茶几是玻璃做的。‎ ‎★9.I have breakfast at 7 a.m.我早上七点钟吃早饭。‎ a.m. 是“早上，中午这前”的意思， 是一个缩略形式，美式英语写作：a.m, 它的对应词是p.m.(下午，午后)。如：‎ I usually go to school at 6:30a.m..and go home at 5:00p.m.. ‎ 我通常早上6：30去上学，下午5：00回家。‎ ‎★10.I talk to my classmates at lunchtime. 我在午餐时间和同学们交谈。‎ talk 这里是动词“讲话，谈话”的意思，表示“和某人讲话”时，可以用talk to/ with sb. ‎ 表示“谈论某事”时，可以用talk about/of sth..如：‎ I want to talk with you. 我想和你谈一谈。‎ Let’s talk about this question together. 让我们一起来谈论一下这个问题。‎ ‎★11. Does Amy walk home after school? 埃米放学后走回家吗？‎ ‎ *walk 是“步行，走路”的意思。“步行去某地”应用walk to…，因为这里的home 是副词，所以省略了walk 后的to。 在副词here, there也要省略to, 如： ‎ ‎(a)My father walks to the factory every day.我父亲每天步行去工厂。‎ ‎(b)The park is not far from here, let’s walk there. 公园离这儿不远，让我们走去吧。‎ ‎*after school 意思是“放学后”，类似的还有：after class“下课后”，after supper“晚饭后”　 ‎ ‎★12.Here are some pictures of my family. 这里是我家人的一些照片。‎ Here are … 用来表示“这里有（是）……”的意思，其单数形式是“Here is/ Here’s…”, 如：‎ Here are some flowers for you, Miss Wu. 吴老师，这里是送给你的一些花。‎ ‎★13.I hope you and your family are well. 我希望你和你的家人身体健康。‎ hope 意思是“希望”。常用于以下结构中：‎ ‎(a) hope （that） +句子“希望……”如：‎ I hope (that) you can come to my birthday party tonight. 我希望你今晚能来参加我的生日会。‎ ‎(b) hope to do sth. “希望做某事”, 如：‎ Daniel hopes to be a computer programmer when he grows up. ‎ 丹尼尔长大后希望成为一个电脑程序员。‎ ‎(c) hope for sth“希望得到……”，如：‎ We all hope for the first place in the match. 我们都希望能在比赛中获得第一。‎ 注意：我们不可用hope sb. to do sth. 的句型。‎ I hope you to help me with my English.(误)‎ I hope (that) you can help me with my English.（正） 我希望你能在英语上帮助我。‎ ‎★14. Li Hua is the newest member of the Huanghe Football Team. ‎ 李华是黄河足球队的一名最新队员。‎ ‎*the newest是形容词的最高级形式，表示“最新的”。再如：the tallest 最高的，the nearest 最近的，the longest 最长的，同学看出形容词最高级形式的构成规则了吗？‎ ‎*a member of … 意思是“……的一名成员”。如：‎ Sandy is a member of the school basketball team. ‎ ‎=Sandy is in/ on the school basketball team. 桑迪是学校篮球队的成员。‎ ‎★15.Can I borrow your pen? 我能借你的钢笔用一下吗？‎ ‎ borrow 的意思是“向……（某人）借……（某物）”，指“借进”，后接介词from。若要表示“把……(某物)借给……(某人)”,则用lend, 后接下来to. 如:‎ Can I borrow your bike? (=Can I borrow a bike from you?) 我可以借用一下你的自行车吗?‎ ‎---Can I borrow your rubber? 我能借一下你的橡皮吗?‎ ‎---Sorry, mine is at home, I can’t lend it to you. 对不起,我的在家里,我没法借给你.‎ ‎★16. I have lots of CDs. 我有许多碟片.‎ ‎ lots of 的意思是 “许多,很多”. 相当于a lot of, 后面可接可数名词或不可数名词。接可数名词时又相当于many, 接不可数名词时相当于much。如：‎ ‎(a) I have a lot of/ lots of/ many good friends at school. 在学校我有许多好朋友。‎ ‎(b) There is a lot of/ lots of/ much milk in the glass. 玻璃杯里有许多牛奶。‎ ‎★17.Me, too. 我也是；我也一样。‎ 这是一种简略的表达方法，表示自己和别人有着相同的想法或情况。 如：‎ ‎--I like playing computer games. 我喜欢打电脑游戏。 -- Me, too. 我也是。‎ ‎★18.If you do not know the answer to something, you say….‎ 如果你不知道某件事情的答案，你说……。‎ the answer to意为“……的答案”，to为介词，表示所属关系。如：‎ the key to the room  房间的钥匙 the answer to the questions  问题的答案 the key to the exercises练习的答案 ‎★19.I am 1.35metres tall.我身高1.35米。‎ ‎1.35metres tall意为“高1.35米”，英语中用“数字+单位+形容词”可以表示长，宽，高，年龄，身高等。如：‎ That street is about 9 kilometers long and 6 meters wide.那道街长9公里，宽6米。‎ The office building is more than 30 meters high. 办公楼30多米高。‎ His brother is 1.80 meters tall. 他的哥哥身高一米八。‎ My sister is 12 years old. 我妹妹12岁。‎ 就多长，多宽等提问用how +形容词。如：‎ How long is the bridge? It’s over 200 meters long. 这条桥有多长？ 200多米长。‎ How old is your father? He is over forty years old.你爸爸年龄是多少？他40多岁。‎ 四．话题作文。‎ ‎ 如何写自我介绍 本单元的写作项目是写一篇向别人介绍自己的短文。写此类文章时可遵循以下步骤：‎ ‎1.写出你的名字，年龄和居住地;‎ ‎2.写出你的外表;‎ ‎3.介绍你的爱好;‎ ‎4.写出你经常做的事情.‎ 范文:‎ ‎ Hello!I’m Jane.I am 12 years old.I am in Class One,Grade Seven.I was born in Nanjing,but now I live in Beijing with my parents.‎ ‎ I am tall.I have long black hair and I wear glasses.I enjoy listening to music.I learn many subjects at school.I am good at English.I often help my classmates with their English.My teachers and my friends all like me.They say I’m polite and helpful.On weekends,I like watching TV with my family at home.‎ ‎ This is me,an outgoing and confident girl! ‎ ‎7A Unit 2知识梳理 一. 重点单词。‎ A.四会单词。‎ ‎1.sleep v. 睡觉 2.exercise v/n. 锻炼 3.homework n. 家庭作业 4.supper n. 晚餐 5.best adj 最好的 6.chat v. 聊天 7.first adj/adv. 首先 8.spend v. 花费 ‎ ‎9.library n. 图书馆 10.Tuesday n. 星期二 11.Friday n. 星期五 12.swimmer n.游泳者 ‎13.kind n. 种类 14.mail n. 邮件 15.send v. 发送 16.use v. 使用 ‎ ‎17.twice adv. 两次 18.week n. 星期 19.newspaper n. 报纸 20. together adv. 一起 21.much adj. 许多的 22. both pron/adj. 两者;两者的 23. Monday n. 星期一 ‎24.Wednesday n. 星期三 25.Thursday n. 星期四 26.talk n. 演讲 27.busy adj. 忙的 ‎ ‎28.trip n. 旅行 33.each adj. 每个的 34.price n. 价格 35.maybe adv. 大概 36.wish v. 希望 37.world n. 世界 38.difficult adj. 难的 39.answer n. 答案 40.question n. 问题 41.clever adj. 聪明的 42.part n. 部分 B.词形变换。‎ ‎1.sleep---slept---slept 2.activity---activities 3.chat---chatting---chatted---chatted 4.spend---spent---spent 5.library---libraries 6.send---sent---sent ‎ ‎7. wish---wishes 8.good/well---better---best ‎ ‎9.use---useful---useless 10.many/much---more---most ‎ 二．重点词组。‎ ‎1.have fun 尽情的玩 ‎ ‎2.do after--school activities进行课外活动 ‎3.do(one’s)homework 做家庭作业 ‎ ‎4.go to bed 上床睡觉 ‎5.more than 超过 ‎ ‎6.buy…from… 从…买…‎ ‎7.the whole school 整个学校 ‎ ‎8.all the other student所有其他学生 ‎ ‎9.twice a week 一周两次 ‎ ‎10.listen to the radio 听广播 ‎ ‎11.make model planes 制作飞机模型 ‎ ‎12.read newspaper看报纸 ‎ ‎13.write e---mails 写电子邮件 ‎ ‎14.watch a football match看足球比赛 ‎ ‎15.watch a film看电影 ‎ ‎16.win the first prize获得第一名 ‎ ‎17.tell sb about告诉某人…. ‎ ‎18.meet up with 偶然遇见,逅邂 ‎19.go to dancing lesson 去上舞蹈课 ‎ ‎20.chat with sb和某人聊天 ‎ ‎21.ask (sb) a question 问某人一个问题 ‎ ‎22.go on a school trip去参加学校的短途旅行 ‎ ‎23.get some information about获得关于…….的信息 ‎ ‎24.the China Space Museum中国航空博物馆 ‎ ‎25.wake sb up e.g. wake me up 叫醒我 ‎ ‎26.on Mondays = every Monday 每周一 ‎27.have much time to do sth．有很多时间做某事 ‎ ‎28.write to sb 写信给某人 ‎ ‎29.do morning exercises 做早操 ‎30.in the playground 在操场 ‎ ‎31.practise doing sth 练习做某事 ‎32.would like to do sth.=want to do sth 想要做某事 ‎ ‎33.look forward to doing sth. 期待做某事 ‎34.learn more about sth 学习更多关于 ‎ ‎35.get ready to do sth.=get ready for sth 准备……‎ ‎36.thank sb. for doing sth 感谢某人做某事 ‎37.e-mail sb. =send an e-mail to sb 写电邮给某人 ‎38.teach sb. sth. =teach sth to sb 教某人某事 ‎ ‎39. at lunchtime 在午餐时 ‎40.say hello to sb 和某人问好 ‎ ‎41.all the time 一直 ‎ ‎42.be good for sb 对某人有好处 ‎ ‎43.comic books 漫画书 ‎ ‎44.need to do sth. 需要做某事 ‎ ‎45.keep a diary 写日记 ‎ ‎46.at Beijing Sunshine Secondary School 在北京阳光中学 ‎ ‎47.go to the Reading Club 去阅读俱乐部 ‎ ‎48.practise with my friends 和我的朋友练习 ‎49.a member of the Swimming Club 游泳俱乐部的一个成员 ‎ ‎50.have a good time 玩的愉快 ‎ ‎51.on the volleyball court 在排球场 ‎52.know a lot about computers 了解许多关于电脑 ‎ ‎53.be busy doing sth 忙于做某事 ‎54.have time to do sth 有时间做某事 ‎55.the China Science and Technology Museum 中国科技博物馆 ‎56. the price for each student 每个学生的价格 ‎57.What do you think of…？ 你觉得…怎么样？‎ ‎58.be difficult to do sth 做某事困难 三.重点句子。‎ ‎★1.Wake up,Eddie!埃迪，醒醒！‎ wake up有两个意思：1）醒来。2）叫醒，唤醒 如：Eddie wakes up at 10 o’clock.埃迪十点醒来。‎ 当所唤醒的对象是普通名词时，该名词可以放在wake与up中间，也可以放在后面。‎ 如：wake up Eddie/wake Eddie up 当所唤醒的对象是代词时，该代词用宾格且必须放在wake与up中间。‎ 如：Don’t wake him up. 别叫醒他。‎ ‎★2.Is it time for breakfast? 该吃早饭了吗/到吃早饭的时间了吗？‎ 它的陈述句为：It’s time for breakfast.‎ It’s time for = It’s time for doing = It’s time to do该做某事了/是做某事的时间了 如：该上学了。It’s time for school./It’s time for going to school./It’s time to go to school. ‎ ‎★3.What are you going to do today,Eddie？ 埃迪，你今天打算干什么？ ‎ be going to do sth表示将要发生或打算做的事 如: I am going to clean my room tomorrow. 我明天要打扫我的房间。 ‎ ‎★4．After breakfast I want to go to sleep. 早饭后我想睡觉。‎ want to do sth 想要做某事 如：I want to buy a new bike. 我想买一辆新自行车。‎ go to sleep /go to bed 两个短语都有睡觉的意思，go to sleep指进入睡眠的状态，而go to bed是指到床上，不一定睡着。‎ 如:I go to bed early, but go to sleep late. 我上床很早，但是很晚才睡着。‎ ‎★5．play the piano 弹钢琴 play 有“玩，打/踢，演奏”的意思，在球类运动前不加冠词，如：play football踢足球 play basketball打篮球。在乐器前要加定冠词the ,如：play the violin 弹小提琴 ‎★6.Please get some information about the China Space museum, the China science and technology Museum and Beijing Zoo. ‎ 请收集一些关于中国太空博物馆，中国科技博物馆和北京动物园的信息。‎ information 信息，情况。不可数名词。‎ ‎★7.Thanks for organizing the class trip. 谢谢您组织这次班级旅行。‎ Thank sb for doing sth因某事而感谢某人 如：Thank you for helping me. 谢谢你帮助我。‎ ‎★8.The price for each student is 5.00. 每位学生票价五元。‎ price价格，价钱 The price is low. 价钱低。 ‎ What’s the price of the book?=How much is the book? 这本书的价格是多少？‎ ‎★9.We are looking forward to a great out. 我们都期盼着好好出去玩一天。‎ look forward to sth 期盼某事（物）‎ look forward to doing sth 期盼做某事 ‎ 如：We are looking forward your visit. 我们在期待着你的来访。‎ They are looking forward to seeing you again. 他们期盼着能再次见到你。‎ ‎★10.I forgot to bring my homework . 我忘记带作业了。‎ forgot 是forget的过去式 ‎ forget to do sth 忘记做某事 ‎ 如：Don’t forget to close the door when you leave. 离开时别忘了关门。‎ bring 拿来，带来 take 拿走，带走 ‎★11.Borrow some money 借点钱 ‎ borrow 借入 lend 借出 如：May I borrow your bike? 我能借你的自行车吗?‎ Can you lend me your bike? 你能把自行车借给我吗？‎ ‎★12.Turn on the lights. 打开灯。‎ turn on 打开（电器，自来水等），反意短语为：turn off ‎★13.his book is very interesting. 这本书很有趣。‎ interesting “有趣的”。多用来修饰事物，也可以修饰人。‎ interested “感兴趣的“，常用于短语be interested in中，表示“对----感兴趣“。‎ ‎★14.Peter won the first prize in the football match yesterday.‎ 彼得在昨天的足球比赛中获得了第一名。‎ win the first prize 获得第一名。‎ ‎★15.She was really pleased. 她确实很高兴。‎ ‎ be pleased with ----- 对---感到高兴 如：My teacher is very pleased with my homework. 我的老师对我的作业很满意。‎ ‎★16.She is very busy and does not have much time to chat with her friends.‎ 她很忙，没有多少时间和她的朋友聊天。‎ have ( no ) time to do sth （没）有时间做某事 chat with sb 与某人聊天 如：I have no time to chat with you today. 我今天没有时间和你聊天。‎ ‎★17.I’m not tall enough to reach the basket. 我个子不够高，够不到篮子。‎ ‎(1) enough 形容词，放在所修饰的名词前面，也可以放在后面。‎ 如：I don’t have enough money to buy the car. 我没有足够的钱买车。‎ ‎(2) enough 副词，放在被修饰的形容词或副词后面。‎ 如：He is old enough to go to school. 他到上学的年龄了。‎ ‎★18.It is fun to look at the pictures when I finish drawing them.‎ 当我画完画的时候，看着它们很有意思。‎ It’s +形容词+（for sb）+to do sth (对某人来说)做某事-------‎ 如：It’s hard for me to finish the work in an hour.‎ 一个小时之内完成这项工作对我来说很难。‎ finish doing sth做完某事 ‎★19.There are more than 1800 students at my school. 我的学校里有1800多名学生。‎ more than多于，超过 ，它的反义词是：less than不到，少于 如：There are more than (less than) 30 boys in my class.我们班有30多个（不到30个）男孩。‎ ‎★20.Sometimes, we buy snacks from the tuck. 有时我们从零食店买零食。‎ buy sth from sp从某处买某物 I often buy school things from this shop. 我经常在这个商店买学习用品。 ‎ buy sth for sb=buy sb sth 买某物给某人 如：Mother often buys me school things.=Mother often buys school things for me.‎ ‎★21.I spend about an hour a day doing my homework . 我每天花一个小时左右的时间做作业。‎ spend time/money（in）doing/on sth 做某事花-----时间/钱 如：Don’t spend too much time (in) watching/on TV. 不要花太多的时间看电视。‎ ‎★22.几种“看”的表示方法：‎ ‎(1)look看。朝----看， look at ----有一定的方向性，但不一定看得见。‎ 如:Please look at the blackboard. 请看黑板。‎ ‎(2)see “看到---，看见----”。‎ 如：Can you see the birds in the tree? 你能看到树上的鸟吗？‎ ‎(3)watch 观看电视、比赛、戏剧等”，有注视的意思。‎ 如：watch TV 看电视 ‎(4)read 看书籍、报刊、杂志等。‎ 如：Mr Green reads evening paper every day. 格林先生每天看晚报。‎ 四．话题作文。‎ ‎ 描写学校生活 本单元的写作项目是写一篇关于你的校园生活的电子邮件并发给你的朋友。写此类文章时可遵循以下步骤：‎ ‎1.介绍自己及学校的基本情况;‎ ‎2.班级的情况;‎ ‎3.学校上课的情况;‎ ‎4.课后生活.‎ 范文:‎ Dear Friend,‎ Hello,my name is Mary.I am a student at No.8 Middle School.I am new here.But I love my new school.It’s beautiful and big.I am in Class 1, Grade 7.‎ There are many nice students in my class.I have a good friend,and her name is Betty.We often chat with each other or read books.My teachers are all nice to us.We love them very much.‎ Our lessons begin at 8:00 a.m.We have 7 lessons every day.My favourite lessons are English and Art.We have a lot of homework to do.I must spend about 3 hours a day doing my homework.‎ After school,I go to play football.Sometimes,I also play ping-pong with my friends.We always have a good time at our school.I love our school!‎ Please e-mail me soon!‎ Mary ‎7 A Unit 3 知识梳理 一、重点单词 A:四会单词：‎ ‎1.Interesting n. 有趣的 2.dress vt. 给..穿衣 n. 服装 ‎3.as. prep 作为， 当作， 像 4.Christmas n. 圣诞节 ‎5.festival n. 节日 6.October n.十月 ‎7.call v. 把 叫做 8.shout vt.喊叫 ‎9.candy n. 糖果 10 if conj. 如果，假如 ‎11.face n. 脸 12 .wonderful adj.出色的，极好的 ‎13.tooth n. 牙齿 14.chocolate n. 巧克力 ‎15.hot adj.热的 16.drink n.饮料 v.喝， 饮 ‎17.food n.食物， 食品 18.card n.卡片 ‎19.rice. n. 米饭， 稻， 大米 20.film n. 电影，胶卷 ‎21.holiday n. 假期， 假日 22.cold adj.寒冷的 ‎23.spring n. 春天 24.summer n. 夏天 ‎25.autumn n. 秋天 26.winter n. 冬天 ‎27.January n. 一月 28.February n. 二月 ‎29.March n. 三月 30.April n. 四月 ‎31.May n. 五月 32.June n. 六月 ‎33.July n. 七月 34August n. 八月 ‎35.September n. 九月 36. November n.十一月 ‎37.December n. 十二月 38.Sunday n. 星期日 ‎39.Saturday n. 星期六 40.meeting n.会议 ‎41.when conj. 当….. 什么时候 42 Why adv.为什么 ‎43.by prep 通过, 靠, 用 44.fish vi.钓鱼, 捕鱼 ‎45.train. n. 火车 46.money n.钱 ‎47.lion n. 狮子 48.date n. 日期 ‎49.place n. 地方 50.street n.街道 ‎51.time n.次数 52.west n.西方 ‎53.candle n. 蜡烛 54.way n. 方式, 方法 ‎55.light n. 光, 光线 56.warm adj 暖和的, 温暖的 B: 单词转换：‎ ‎1.celebrate (v.)---celebration (n.) 2.interest (n.)—interesting(adj.) interested(adj.)‎ ‎3.wonder(n.)---wonderful(adj) wonderfully(adv.) ‎ ‎4.tooth(n.)---teeth(复数) 5.cut—cut—cut(v.) ‎ ‎6.nation(n.)----national(adj). 7.excite---exciting/ excited (adj) ‎ ‎8.穿过(prep.)----through(内部穿过) across（表面穿过）‎ 二、重点短语：‎ ‎1.Happy Halloween!万圣节快乐! ‎ ‎2. New Year’s Day 新年,元旦 ‎3.Chinese New Year 春节 ‎ ‎4. .May Day 五一国际劳动节 ‎5.the Dragon Boat Festival 端午节,龙舟节 ‎ ‎6. the Mid--Autumn Festival 中秋节 ‎ ‎7. Children’s Day 儿童节 ‎ ‎8. Teachers’ Day 教师节 ‎ ‎9. National Day 国庆节 ‎ ‎10..celebrate Christmas 庆祝圣诞节 ‎11.at Easter在复活节 ‎ ‎12. Thanksgiving Day感恩节 ‎13.one’s favourite festival 最喜欢的节目. ‎ ‎14dress up as 装扮,精心打扮 ‎ ‎15.have a long holiday 度一个长假 ‎ ‎16.have a party 开聚会 ‎17 play a game called“trick or treat”玩一个叫“不招待就使坏”的游戏 a game called…=a game named …=a game with the name一个名叫…的游戏 ‎18. knock on/at 敲门 ‎ ‎19. play a trick on…对…使用诡计 ‎ ‎20. rice dumplings粽子 ‎ ‎21. traditional Chinese food 传统中国风味的食品 ‎22.lion dance 舞狮子 ‎ ‎23. .red packets 红包 ‎24. be on holiday 在度假 ‎ ‎25.this year 今年 ‎ ‎26.cut out 切成,剪成 ‎ ‎27.receive a letter from… 收到…..的来信 ‎ ‎28.hot drinks 热饮 ‎ ‎29.on the evening of October 31st 在十月31号的晚上 ‎30.look like看起来像 ‎ ‎31..see the doctor 看医生 ‎ ‎32..during the first week of November 在十一月的第一周期间 ‎33.go to school by bus 乘公共汽车上学 ‎34.be very excited 非常激动/兴奋 ‎ ‎35. at night 在夜晚 ‎ ‎36.on the other side of 在…的另一边 ‎ ‎37.try to do sth 努力做某事 ‎ ‎38.in the west 在西方,在西方国家 ‎ ‎39.in the USA 在美国 ‎ ‎40 .buy sb .Sth. 给某人买东西 ‎ ‎41. sharp teeth锋利的牙齿 ‎42. in the pencil case= in the pencil box在铅笔盒里 ‎43. chat with sb.on the Internet在互联网上与某人聊天 ‎44.plan to do sth. 计划做某事 ‎ ‎45. help sb. do sth. 帮助某人做某事 ‎46. so much如此（多），这么 ‎ ‎47. in many ways通过许多方式 ‎48. in a special costume穿特殊的服装 ‎ ‎49.tell sb. about sth. 告诉某人某事 ‎50. put up…on the wall把……挂在墙上 ‎ ‎51. at the weekend在周末 ‎52. make a plan制定计划 ‎ ‎53. from 9 p.m. to midnight从晚上9.00到午夜 ‎54.paint one’s face给某人的脸上涂上油彩. ‎ ‎55.like to do sth. 喜欢做某事 ‎56. thank sb. for doing sth.感谢某人做某事 ‎ ‎57. give sb. sth. as a treat以……招待某人 ‎58.give us some candy as a treat= give us a treat of some candy ‎59. special costumes with masks带面具的特别服装 ‎60. .make pumpkin lanterns制作南瓜灯 ‎ ‎61. make A out of B=make A from B用Ｂ制作Ａ ‎62. make sth. for sb.=make sb. sth. 为某人制作某物.…‎ ‎63.put sth. in=put sth. into…把某物放进 ‎ ‎64. want to do sth. 想要做某事 ‎ ‎65. at breakfast (lunch/ supper) 在吃早餐（午餐/晚餐）的时候 ‎66.Monkey King美猴王 ‎ ‎67.take sb. for a walk带某人去散步 ‎68.Christmas presents圣诞礼物 ‎ ‎69.shine through..照射过 ‎70. through the eyes透过眼睛 ‎ ‎71.go swimming 去游泳 ‎72.go to the Reading Club 去读书俱乐部 ‎ ‎73.like fishing 喜欢钓鱼 ‎74.take place发生 ‎ ‎75.talk about谈论 三、语法 A.时间介词的用法 ‎1.in+ 年／季节／月份 eg: in 2008/ in spring/summer/autumn/ winter in January/February/ March/ April/ May/ June /July/ August/ September/October/November/December ‎2.in+一天里的一段时间eg: in the morning/ afternoon/ evening ‎3.on+具体的日子eg: on Monday (morning) on the night of September on a cold winter evening ‎4.at+点时间eg: at 8 注：at Hawllowen/ night/ noon B.some 与 any 的用法 ‎1.Some ‎ ‎1). 用于肯定句 ‎2). 用于婉转问句，或当我们提出要求或请求，又期望得到对方“肯定”的回答时。‎ Eg: There are some apple trees in the hill. There is some water in the bottle.‎ Would you like to give me some orange juice?‎ ‎2.Any 用于否定、疑问句中。‎ Eg: Are there any boy students in your class?‎ 注： 当any 表示”任何“时，可用在肯定句中，修饰单数或复数名词。‎ Eg: Any boy can do it.任何男孩都能做它。‎ I think any of his movies would interest you.我想随便他的哪一部电影都会使你感兴趣。‎ C.特殊疑问句： 特殊疑问词 + 一般疑问句 构成 注意：特殊疑问词:who/whose.(n.)../which/ what/what colour/ when/what time/ where/ why/ how/how often/ how soon/ how long /how far/ how much/ how many/‎ 四、重点语句：‎ ‎1.Let’s celebrate. 让我们来庆祝！Let sb. do sth.‎ ‎2.wh- 句子 What are you doing? 你在干什么？‎ What do we do for Halloween? 万圣节我们做什么？‎ Which is your favourite festival? 你最喜爱的节日是哪一个？‎ When is your birthday?你的生日时什么时候？‎ Who gives you the presents?谁给了你礼物？‎ Why do you like your birthday so much?你为什么如此喜欢你的生日？‎ How do we make a pumpkin lantern?我们如何做一个南瓜灯？‎ What do we have for lunch?我们早餐吃什么？‎ Where are you going?你准备去哪？‎ How do you go to school?你如何去上学？‎ Whose bag is this?这是谁的包？‎ ‎3.If they do not give us a treat , we can play a trick on ‎ them.如果他们不给我们招待，我们就作弄他们。‎ If 引导的条件句，注意时态。从句一般代将来。‎ Eg: If Tom comes here, I’ll call you.‎ ‎4.Sometimes we paint our faces and people do not know who we are .‎ 有时我们把脸上图上油彩，人们就不认识我们是谁。‎ ‎“who we are” 从句用陈述语序。‎ ‎5.It’s my first time to see it.我第一次看到它。‎ ‎“it” 作形式主语。‎ Eg: It is good to exercise every day.‎ It takes me two hours to finish my homework.‎ ‎6.We play a game called ‘trick or treat’.我们玩“不招待就使坏”的游戏。‎ Eg; We know a boy named Tom. 我们认识一个叫汤姆的男孩。‎ I read a book written by Luxun yesterday. 昨天我读了一本鲁迅写的书。‎ I like watching the film directed by Zhangyimou. 我喜欢看张艺谋导演的电影。‎ 五、话题作文 如何写关于节日的文章 本单元的写作项目是写一篇有关节日及其庆祝方式的短文。写此类文章时可遵循以下步骤：‎ ‎1.写出节日的名称；‎ ‎2.写出节日的时间；‎ ‎3.写出此节日的庆祝方式。‎ Eg: 请写一篇有关中国的传统节日------春节的文章。词数：100左右。‎ My Favourite Festival------Chinese Spring Festival ‎ Chinese New Year is also called Spring Festival. It is the most important festival for Chinese people. It usually comes in January or February. Each lunar year(阴历年) has a name. We may call it the year of monkey, the year of snake, or the year of tiger and so on. The year of 2008 is called the year of mouse. People go to the shops to buy clothes and food before the festival. Families get together and have a big dinner on Chinese New Year’s Eve. After that, people watch TV, and stay up late to welcome the New Year. At last, at midnight it is an important time for the family,The young people wish the older people a happy New Year. The older people give children red pockets. The family then goes to sleep.‎ On the first day of Chinese New Year, people wear new clothes and visit their friends.‎ During the holidays, people always have a very good time, especially children.‎ ‎7A Unit 4 知识梳理 一、重点单词：‎ A:四会单词：‎ ‎1.hangry adj.饿 2.never adv.从不，决不 ‎3. vegetable n. 蔬菜 4.hate vt.讨厌，恨 ‎5.carrot n.胡萝卜 6.healthy adj.健康的，有益健康的 ‎7.dancer n.跳舞者， 舞蹈演员 8.important adj.重要的 ‎9.easy adj.容易的，简单的 10.tired adj.疲劳的，累的 ‎11.keep vt.保持 12.fit adj 健康的，结实的 ‎13.seldom adv. 很少，不常 14. sweet adj. 甜的 n.糖果 ‎15.meal n. 一餐饭 16.sugar n.糖 ‎17.fruit n.水果 18. milk n.牛奶 ‎19.bread n.面包 20. meat n.（猪、牛、羊等的）肉 ‎21.study vi./vt.学习 22.top adj.拔尖的，头等的 n.顶，顶部 ‎23.basketball n.篮球 24.fast adv./adj. 快（的）‎ ‎25.change vt./vi.改变， 变化 26.plan vi.计划，打算 ‎27.juice n.果汁，蔬菜汁 28.careful adj.小心的，仔细的 ‎29.water n. 水 30. lemon n.柠檬 ‎31.mango n.芒果 32. tomato n.西红柿 ‎33.beef n.牛肉 34.pork n.猪肉 ‎35.cabbage n.卷心菜 36.story n.故事 ‎37.potato n. 土豆，马铃薯 38.sheep n.绵羊 ‎39.salt n. 盐 40.tea n.茶 ‎41.kilo n.公斤 42.buy vt.买 ‎43.grandpa n.祖父，外祖父 44.bottle n.瓶子 ‎45.noodle n.面条 46.feel vi.觉得，刚到 ‎47.luck n.运气 48.supermarket n.超级市场，超市 ‎49.carry vt.搬运，运输，携带 50. peanut n.花生 ‎51.amount n.数量 52.soup n.汤 B: 单词转换：‎ ‎1.hunger(n.)---hungry (adj) 2.energy(n.)----energetic(adj)‎ ‎3.like(v.)----dislike(v.) 4.health(n.)---healthy/unhealthy (adj)‎ ‎5.dance(v.)---dancer(n.) 6.easy(adj)----easily(adv)‎ ‎7.two---second----twice 8.power(n.)----powerful(adj)‎ ‎9.mango(n.)-----mangoes( 复数) 10. tomato(n.)---tomatoes(复数)‎ ‎11.potato(n.)-----potatoes(复数) 12.luck(n.)---(un)lucky—(un)luckily ‎13.with—without 14.little—less(比较)---least(最高级)‎ ‎15.many/much—more(比较) -most (最高级)16.good---better----best-‎ C:名词：不可数名词与可数名词 不可数名词：Food------meat(un.): beef/pork/fish/chicken(鸡肉)‎ ‎------drink------milk/juice/tea/water/----salt/rice/soup 可数名词复数变形 ‎1.+s ‎2.辅音字母+y结尾，变y为i+es Eg:candy---candies story---stories ‎3.以s, ss, ch, x +es Eg:glass(es) wish(es) watch(es) box(es)‎ ‎4.以o结尾+s/es 注：黑人英雄爱吃西红柿，土豆，芒果 +es Eg: negro(es) hero(es) tomato(es) potato(es) mango(es)‎ ‎5.以f/fe 结尾， 变f/fe为v+esEg: shelf---shelves knife---knives wife---wives ‎6.不规则变形：‎ 单复数不变的： sheep fish Chinese police people deer 中间为oo变为 ee: foot—feet tooth---teeth goose----geese 中间为a变为 e: man-----men woman---women 注：American----Americans German---Germans Walkman---walkmans ‎ 二、重点短语：‎ ‎1.need a lot of energy 需要大量的能量 ‎ ‎2.many times a day 一天多次 ‎ ‎3.want to be a dancer =would like to be a dancer想成为一名舞蹈演员 ‎ ‎4.get/be tired 感到累 ‎5.change one’s diet改变某人的饮食(结构) ‎ ‎6.want to be healthier 想要变得更加健康 ‎7.sweet snacks 甜点心 ‎ ‎8.be good for 对…有好处,对…有益 ‎9.be good at 擅长 ‎ ‎10.a top student 优生,尖子生 ‎11.chat with sb.on the Internet 在网上与某人聊天 ‎ ‎12.fast food 快餐 ‎ ‎13.twice a week 一周两次 ‎ ‎14.three times a week 一周三次 ‎ ‎15. cold drink 冷饮 ‎ ‎16. need sth. to do sth. 需要……做某事 ‎17. hot drink 热饮 ‎ ‎18.a healthy diet 健康的饮食 ‎19.What/how about n./ving ….怎么样？ ‎ ‎20.go roller skating 去溜旱冰 ‎21.ice cream冰淇淋 ‎ ‎22.of course 当然 ‎23.less than 少于 ‎ ‎24.more than=over多于，超过 ‎25.at the supermarket 在超市 ‎ ‎26.make a shopping list列一个购物清单 ‎ ‎27.a glass of milk 一杯牛奶 ‎ ‎28.a bowl of rice 一碗米饭 ‎29.a cup of tea一杯茶 ‎ ‎30.a kilo of meat 一公斤肉 ‎31.a packet of salt一袋食盐 ‎ ‎32.in the kitchen 在厨房 ‎33.a packet of noodles一袋面条 ‎ ‎34.a pot of rice 一锅饭 ‎ ‎35. .keep fit=stay/keep healthy保持健康 ‎ ‎36.good luck with sb. 祝某人好运 ‎37.a glass of orange juice 一杯橙汁 ‎ ‎38. drink some milk 喝一些牛奶 ‎39.eat some biscuits/bread 吃一些饼干、面包 ‎ ‎40.take in 吸入,摄取 ‎ ‎41 green tea 绿茶 . ‎ ‎42.black tea 红茶 ‎ ‎43. not…any more 不再,再也不 ‎ ‎44. not…at all 一点也不 ‎45.be hungry/ be full饥饿/饱 ‎ ‎46. walk to = go to…on foot走到……地方去 ‎47 walk to my bowl 走向我碗 ‎ ‎48 between meals两餐之间 ‎49. change the diet改变饮食习惯 ‎ ‎50.sweet snacks甜食 ‎51. eat/ have sth. for breakfast/ supper/ lunch早餐/午餐/晚餐吃…‎ ‎52. after class课后 ‎ ‎53.after dinner 饭后 ‎54. how often多久一次 ‎ ‎55. get energy from从……获取能量 ‎56 too much sugar太多的糖 ‎ ‎57.the Get Fit Club 健身俱乐部 ‎58. so many bananas如此多的香蕉 ‎ ‎59. feel much better感觉好多了 ‎60.in front of 在……前面 ‎ ‎61..cook for sb. 为某人烧…‎ ‎62.a glass of/ a bowl of/ a cup of/ a kilo of/ a packet of…. 一杯/一碗/一杯/一公斤/一包…‎ ‎63..dance for two hours跳舞两个小时 ‎64.be important for sb. 对某人来说重要 ‎ ‎65..would like to do sth.想/愿意做某事 ‎66.be important to do sth. 做某事重要 ‎ ‎67.watch less TV少看电视 ‎ ‎68 watch two hours of TV 看两个小时的电视 ‎ ‎69..listen to…听 ‎70. Congratulations! 祝贺你 ‎ ‎71..how long多长时间 ‎72..how much多少/问价钱 ‎ ‎73.. go to the supermarket去超市 ‎74.feel well/ healthy感觉好/健康 ‎ ‎75..be careful with sth. 小心某物 ‎76..carry all that food携带所有的那些食物 ‎ ‎77..healthy eating健康饮食 ‎78.have good health=be in good health=be/keep/stay healthy (fit)身体健康 ‎79..do some exercise=take some exercise.=exercise more多锻炼 ‎80.get fat变胖 ‎ ‎81. on the tree/ in the tree在树上 ‎82. different kinds of…不同种类的/各种各样的 ‎83.. plan to do sth.=make a plan to do sth. 计划做某事 ‎84.. lie on the couch躺在长发上 ‎ ‎85. on one’s list在清单上 ‎ ‎86.play basketball / volleyball/ badminton/football打篮球、排球、羽毛球，踢足球 ‎87.a swimming pool 游泳池 ‎ ‎88.go swimming 去游泳 ‎89. sb. spend doing 花…做某事= spend….on n.‎ ‎90.go to one’s dancing lesson 去上跳舞课 ‎ ‎91.have much/no/..time to do sth. 有…做某事 ‎92.be busy with n.= be busy doing sth.忙于做某事 三、重点语句：‎ ‎1.Let’s have a hamburger. 让我们来吃汉堡。‎ ‎2. Congratulations! 祝贺你 ‎3.What is your favourite food? 你最喜欢的食品是什么？=What food do you like best?‎ ‎4.It’s very easy for me to get tired. 对我来说变累很容易。‎ It’s also important for me to drink lots of water every day.对我来说每天喝许多水也是重要的。‎ ‎★It is/was + adj. + for sb. to do sth. 对某人来说做某事是 Eg: It’s very excited for the students.to hear this exciting news.‎ 学生听到这令人兴奋的消息是非常兴奋的 It’s very healthy for the old to exercise more.每天多锻炼对老人是健康的。‎ ‎5.Daniel spends all his free time sitting in front of the computer.‎ 丹尼尔花费他所有的时间坐在电脑前面。‎ In front of “在…前面“ 指在某范围外的前面 Eg: There is a road in front of the house.房前有一条公路。‎ There is a playground in front of the building. 楼前有一个操场。‎ In the front of “在…前面“ 指在某范围内的前面 Eg: There is a desk in the front of the classroom.教室的前面有一张桌子。‎ A man is sitting in the front of the car. 一个男人正坐在小汽车的前面。‎ ‎6.Wow, we have so many things for dinner.哇，晚饭我们有如此多的东西。‎ So many 意为“如此多的”修饰可数名词复数 Eg: There are so many people over there.那边有如此多的人。‎ So much意为“如此多的”修饰不可数名词 Eg: She has so much money for books. 她有很多钱买书。‎ There is so much water. 有如此多的水。‎ ‎7.Where are you going for dinner?你打算去那儿吃饭？‎ for 表示去向、目的或功能 eg: Let’s go for a walk. 我们出去散步吧。‎ What did you do that for? 你为什么做那件事？‎ ‎8.表达喜欢与不喜欢 ‎-----What food do you like? 你喜欢什么食物？----What about fish?鱼怎么样？‎ What’s your favourite? 你最喜欢什么？‎ ‎----Would you like ….你想要…..吗？‎ ‎----I’d like……我想要…..‎ I like/dislike/ hate/ love….‎ ‎9.How often-----6个频率副词（never/seldom/sometimes/often/usually/always）‎ ‎-----every…. -----次数时间 四、话题作文 ‎ 关于饮食习惯和生活方式的文章 ‎ 本单元的写作项目是：写一篇关于自己或他人饮食习惯和生活方式的文章，写此类文章时可遵循以下步骤：‎ ‎ 1.分组讨论自己或他人的饮食习惯和生活方式；‎ ‎ 2.把得出的结论在组内交流；‎ ‎ 3.注意在文章的内容中，先有介绍某人的文字，后有关于某人饮食习惯和生活方式的描写。‎ ‎ Eg: I have a friend. Her name is Xin Xin. She is fourteen years old. She is fat, because she seldom exercises. And she loves eating sweet food very much. She sometimes has fruit and vegetables. She always eats hamburgers for lunch. She wants to play badminton, but she can’t do well. She always gets tired. She plans to have healthy diets. Can you help her?‎ ‎7A Unit5 知识梳理 一. 重点单词 A.四会单词 ‎1.free adj. 空闲的 2.wallet n. 钱包 ‎ ‎3.already adv. 已经 4.shopkeeper n. 店主 ‎ ‎5.minute n.分钟 6.cost v. 值(多少钱)‎ ‎7.expensive adj. 昂贵的 8.match vt. 与……相配 ‎ ‎9.also adv.也 10.enough adj. 足够的 ‎ ‎11.something pron. 某事，某物 12.high adj. 高的 ‎ ‎13.wait v.等 14.bookshop n. 书店 ‎ ‎15.invite v. 邀请 16.visit v. 拜访 ‎ ‎17.turn n. 轮次 18.pay v.付钱 ‎ ‎19.poor adj. 贫穷的 20.country n. 国家 ‎ ‎21.pair n.双,对,副 22.size n. 尺寸 ‎ ‎23.fit v.合脚，合身 24.cheap adj. 便宜的 ‎ ‎25.centre n. 中心 26.before adv. 以前 ‎ ‎27.fun adj. 有趣的 28.cry v. 哭喊 29. little adj. 年幼的，小的 B. 词形转换 ‎1.wait—waiter—waitress 2.invite v.—invitation n. ‎ ‎3.visit n./v.—visitor 4.turn v.—turn n. ‎ ‎5.donate v.—donation n. 6.pay—paid—paid ‎ ‎7.cost—cost—cost 8.collect v.—collection n.‎ 二．重点短语 ‎1.buy sb. sth. （v. + IO + DO） = buy sth. for sb. 给某人买某物 ‎2.make wishes 许愿 ‎ ‎3.see you later 回头见 ‎4.pay for her new shoes 为她的新鞋付款 ‎ ‎5.children in need 需要帮助的孩子 ‎6.call us on 5551 3871 打5551 3871找我们 ‎ ‎7.raise money for them 为他们募集钱 ‎8.good location 好的地理位置 ‎ ‎9.food from different countries 来自不同国家的食物 ‎10.computer games centre 电脑游戏中心 ‎ ‎11.call 110 for help 打110求助 ‎12.football stickers 足球贴画书 ‎ ‎13.look for 寻找 ‎14.football cards足球卡片 ‎ ‎15.just a minute 稍等一会儿 ‎16.take a look = have a look 看一看 ‎ ‎17.Never mind =It doesn’t matter. 不要紧 ‎18.go well with …= match 与…… 相配 ‎ ‎19.clothes shop 服装店 ‎ ‎20.sports shop 体育用品商店 ‎ ‎21.an electrical shop 电器商店 ‎22.in the shop 在商店里 ‎ ‎23.on the top floor 在顶楼 ‎ ‎24.shopping bags 购物袋 ‎ ‎25.at the moment 此刻,现在 ‎ ‎26.at present 目前,现在 ‎ ‎27.wait for one’s turn 等到轮到某人 ‎ ‎28.play with一起玩 ‎ ‎29.need some help with 在…方面需要帮助 ‎ ‎30.say again 再说…一遍 ‎ ‎31. poor area 贫困地区 ‎ ‎32.pocket money 零花钱 ‎ ‎33.writing paper书写纸,信纸 ‎ ‎34.raise money for…为…捐款 ‎ ‎35.five more new words 另外五个生词 ‎36.bus stop 公共汽车站 ‎ ‎37.taxi rank 出租车停靠站 ‎ ‎38.need some more 还需要 一些 ‎39.different kinds of food 不同种类的食物 ‎40.next door (在)隔壁 ‎ ‎41.inside the shop 在店里 ‎ ‎42.outside the mall 在大卖场外 三．重点语句 ‎1.Can I help you? = What can I do for you? 购物时营业员礼貌而热情的客套用语.‎ ‎2.I need you to carry all the bags.我需要你拿所有的包.‎ ‎1).need to do sth. 需要做某事 ‎2).need sb. to do sth. 需要某人做某事 He needs his teacher to give him some advice. 他需要他的老师给他一些建议。‎ ‎3).need sth. 需要某物 ‎3.Could I try them on, please?请问我可以试穿它们吗？‎ try on“试穿”，后接名词时，名词可放在中间或后面；接代词时，代词必须放在中间。‎ Can I try this shoe on? = Can I try on this shoe? Please try it on.‎ ‎★4.How much does the card cost? = How much is the card? = What is the price of the cards?‎ 这些卡片值都少钱？‎ ‎1).spend 主语只能是人，固定结构是sb. spend(s) some money/ time on sth. 或 sb. spend(s) some money/time (in) doing sth. “某人在某物上花了都少钱、时间”。‎ Millie spends half an hour on her homework every day.‎ I spend 30 minutes exercising every morning.‎ ‎2) cost 主语必须是物，固定结构sth. Cost(s) sb. some money.‎ The football cards cost Sandy $5.‎ ‎3) take “花费时间”，主语常为it, It takes sb. some time to do sth. “做某事花费某人都少时间”‎ It takes him one hour to go to the park.‎ ‎4)pay for “为……而付钱”你买那本书花了都少钱？‎ How much did you pay for the book?= How much did you spend on the book?‎ ‎= How much did you spend buying the book?=How much did the book cost you ?‎ 我花了15元买了这个随身听。I paid 15 yuan for the Walkman.=I spent 15 yuan on the Walkman.‎ ‎=I spent 15 yuan buying the Walkman.=The Walkman cost me 15 yuan.‎ ‎5.They match her favourite T-shirt.他们配她最喜欢的T恤衫。‎ ‎1). match = go well with…‎ ‎2）match“配，与……相衬”‎ The picture matches the story. 这幅画与故事很相配。‎ fit “合脚，合身，使适合”, 句中的主语是物，宾语是人。‎ The coat doesn’t fit me. 这身外套我穿不合身。‎ The shoes fit very well. 这双鞋很合适。‎ He is fit for the job. = He is fit to do the job. 他适合做这项的工作。‎ ‎6.There is a discount on last year’s cards.去年的卡片打折。注意句中的介词。‎ ‎7.Wait for my turn. 等着轮到我。这里turn是名词。常用短语：by turns 依次，轮流 in turn 按顺序 turn down 减弱，调低，关小 turn on/off 打开/关上 turn over 翻过来 turn to 变成， 转向 turn …into…把……转换成……‎ ‎8.My cousin visits me.‎ ‎1）visit 作及物动词，名词 We will visit the Unite States.我们将访问美国。‎ This is my first visit to China. 这是我第一次来中国的访问。‎ ‎1). visitor ‎ Many visitors from England are visiting the Great Wall. 来自英国的许多游客在参观长城。‎ ‎9.I am looking for some football cards and stickers of Huanghe Football Team.‎ 我在寻找黄河队的一些足球卡片和贴纸。‎ look for, find, find out辨析：‎ ‎1). look for “寻找”，指“找的过程”He is looking for a job. 他在找工作。‎ ‎2). find “找到”，“找的结果”I found my lost watch.‎ ‎3) find out “弄清楚，查明”‎ Can you find out what time the meeting starts? 你能查清楚会议什么时候开始？‎ ‎10.I don’t have enough money to buy her a CD.‎ enough(adj.) + n., adj./adv. + enough(adv.)‎ There is enough food now. 现在有足够的食物。‎ The food is enough for a week. 食物足够一周用.‎ Today is warm enough to swim. 今天天气暖和的足够可以游泳。‎ ‎11.What size are your feet? I’m a size eight.‎ ‎12.I will take it. = I will buy it. ‎ 四．话题作文 本单元的写作项目是写一篇关于一家大型购物中心的介绍。写此类文章时可遵循以下步骤：‎ ‎1.介绍购物中心的位置;‎ ‎2.介绍购物中心的大致情况;‎ ‎3.描述购物中心的具体情况;‎ ‎4.谈谈自己对购物中心的喜好.‎ 范文:‎ There is a mall near my home . It is not difficult to find. It is between the bank and the police station. The mall is very big . There are six floors and each floor is very big.‎ On the top floor , there are a lot of clothes shops. There are all kinds of clothes. The clothes are very expensive. They are very beautiful , too.On the fifth floor and fourth floor, there are a lot of clothes shops, too. But the prices are not very high. There are also many other things.‎ On the third floor, there are many shoe shops. And on the second floor, there are some flower shops, toy shops and furniture shops.‎ On the first floor, it is a big supermarket. You can buy different kinds of food, fruit and vegetables. They are very good. The mall is a really fun place to go shopping . It is a good place to meet friends. I love it very much.‎ ‎7A Unit 6知识梳理 一．重点单词 A.四会单词 ‎1.fashion n. 时尚 2.lazy adj. 懒惰的 ‎ ‎3.tie n. 领带 4.show n. 表演，演出 ‎5.popular adj. 受欢迎的，流行的 6.hope vt./ n.希望 ‎ ‎7.colourful adj. 色彩艳丽的 8.cotton n. 棉 ‎ ‎9.young adj. 年轻的 10.wool n. 羊毛 ‎ ‎11.leather n. 皮，皮革 12.silk n. 丝绸 ‎ ‎13.smart adj. 神气的 14.modern adj. 摩登的 ‎15.comfortable adj. 舒适的 16.shorts n. 短裤 ‎17.suit n. 套装 18.heavy adj. 重的 ‎19.light adj. 轻的 20.boring adj. 乏味的， 无聊的 ‎ ‎21.afterwards adv. 后来，以后 22.finally adv. 最后 ‎ ‎23.choose vt. 选择 24.anyone pron. 任何一个人 ‎ ‎25.poster n. 海报 26.still adv. 还 B.词形转换 ‎1.suit n.--- suitable adj. 2.comfort n.--- comfortable adj. ‎ ‎3.colour n.--- colourful adj. 4.hope n.--- hopeful adj. ‎ ‎5.lazy—lazier – laziest 6.heavy --- heavier --- heaviest ‎ ‎7.boring adj.--- bored 8.final adj.--- finally adv. ‎ ‎9.choose--- chose --- chosen ‎ 二．重点短语 ‎1.spend 10 more minutes = spend another 10 minutes 再睡10分钟 ‎ ‎2. a b ‎2.wear clothes 穿衣服 ‎ ‎3.raise money for Project Hope 为希望工程募捐 ‎ ‎4.from the 1970s to the 1990s 从二十世纪七十年代到二十世纪九十年代 ‎5.a pair of colourful trainers 一双彩色的运动鞋 ‎6.ask you to help us raise the money 请你帮我们募集钱 ‎ 三．重点语句 ‎1.I spend 10 more minutes in bed.我能在床上再呆10分钟。‎ more与 another 都有“又一，另一”之意，more放在数词后面，another放在数词前面。‎ I ate up three cakes,.but I was still hungry. Please give me one more.‎ These biscuits are very delicious.Can you give me another one?‎ ‎2.What are you going to wear for the show?为这场表演你打算穿什么？‎ 辨析：wear, put on, dress, in, on ‎1) wear 强调“穿、戴”的状态，意为“穿/戴着……” She often wears a long skirt to go to the party.‎ ‎2) put on 表示“穿”的动作 He put on his watch and walked out.‎ ‎3) dress “穿” 常用于dress sb. /dress oneself She is dressing her child.‎ ‎4) i n介词，“人穿着某种衣服” Do you know the boy in T-shirt? The girl in red coat is my sister.‎ ‎5)on介词，“衣服穿在某人身上”‎ The dress looks beautiful on Lily!‎ The glasses don’t look cool onyou.‎ ‎3.Today we are going to show you clothes from the 1970s to the 1990s.‎ 今天我们打算向你们展示20世纪70年代到20世纪90年代的服装。‎ ‎1）from…to... “从……到……”‎ ‎2)the 1990s “20世纪90年代”，数词也可有复数形式。‎ In his seventies, the old man began to learn English.在他七十多岁时，那位老人开始学习英语。‎ When she was in her twenties, she went to France.二十多岁时，她去了法国。‎ ‎4.Can you guess when my clothes are from?你能猜猜我的服装出自什么时代吗？‎ 句中when my clothes are from作动词guess的宾语，是宾语从句，从句用陈述句语序 I don’t know when he will come.‎ ‎5.We hope you enjoy the show.我们希望你喜欢这个表演。‎ ‎1）enjoy doing sth.喜欢做某事 enjoy oneself 过的愉快 ‎2）hope to do sth. 希望做某事， 但是“希望某人做某事”，不能用 “hope sb. to do sth.”,只能用宾语从句形式 I hope you all enjoy yoursleves.希望你们都玩得开心。‎ ‎6.Look, here comes Simon.瞧，西蒙来了。‎ 倒装句。当here,there位于句首时，常引起句子倒装。‎ ‎1）主语是名词，句子完全倒装，其结构是 “Here/There + 动词 + 名词。”‎ Here comes the bus!‎ There goes the bell!‎ ‎2)主语是代词，句子部分倒装，其结构是 “Here/There + 代词 + 动词。”‎ Here he is!‎ Here they are.‎ ‎7. Look, how beautiful Sandy is !‎ 看，桑迪多漂亮啊！‎ 感叹句的句型：‎ ‎1）How + 形容词、副词 + 主语 + 谓语！‎ How hard he works!‎ How silly you are!‎ How beautiful the flowers are!‎ How interesting the film is !‎ ‎2)What a / an + 形容词 + 单数名词（+主语 + 谓语）！‎ What an interesting film it is!‎ ‎3)What + 形容词 +名词（不可数名词或可数名词复数）（+主语 +谓语）！‎ What beautiful flowers they are!‎ ‎8.How often do they exercise?‎ 他们多久锻炼一次？‎ Exercise vi. 锻炼，运动 He doesn’t exercise enough.‎ 他锻炼不够。‎ 作不可数名词时，“锻炼，运动，活动”；作可数名词时，“操练，练习题”‎ He takes exercise everh day.‎ We do morning exercises every day.‎ ‎9.The desk is made of wood.‎ 这桌子是用木材做成的。‎ ‎1）be made of 由……制成，指能看出原材料 ‎2）be made from 由……制成（指看不出原材料）‎ Paper is made from wood.‎ ‎3)be made in 在某地制造 The bikes are made in Shanghai.‎ ‎4)be made by由某人制造 The clothes are made by my mother.‎ ‎10.情态动词can与may:‎ can 1)能力 Can you swim ?‎ ‎2)表示允许，与may意思相近。‎ You can go now.‎ ‎3)表示可能性或请求，用于一般疑问句中。‎ Can you go with us?‎ Can you help me?‎ ‎4)can’t 表示禁止，用于否定句中。‎ You can’t play in the street.‎ You can’t smoke in the hall.‎ may 1) 表示“允许或请求对方许可”时，相当于can ‎---May I ask some questions?‎ ‎---Yes, you may./No, you can’t/must’t.‎ 注意： 以may开头的一般疑问句的否定回答常用mustn’t或can’t.‎ ‎ 2)表示可能性，但可能性不大。‎ 四.话题作文 本单元的写作项目是写一份自己设计的时尚服饰的海报。写此类的文章时可遵循以下步骤：‎ ‎1.首先写出自己要设计的服饰的种类；‎ ‎2.然后写出服装的质的；‎ ‎3.接着写出服装的颜色及其搭配情况；‎ ‎4.其间可适当插入服装颜色及质地的设计原因。‎ 写作之前，一定要注意确定以什么内容或形式为主，明确判断是写人的文章还是叙事的文章，以及中心内容要写什么。‎ 范文：‎ My Fashion Design I want to design a blouse, a suit and a pair of leather shoes. I’m sure they will look modern. The blouse is made of silk, and the suit is made of cotton because I think it is comfortable to wear cotton clothes.‎ First, the colour of the blouse must be white because this colour looks clean.‎ Then, I am going to design a red suit, and it is not too long. I am sure that the white blouse matches the red suit. They look smart. And the suit must fit very well. Finally, I am going to design a pair of leather shoes. They must be white.‎ Now, there is a white blouse, a red suit and a pair of white shoes. They look very clean, smart and beautiful. Do you think so? ‎ ‎7B Unit1 知识梳理 一. 重点单词 A).四会单词 dream adj.梦想中的,理想的 n. 梦;梦想 palace n. 皇宫,宫殿 capital n. 首都 beach n. 海滩 sea n. 海 town n. 镇, 市镇 ‎ over prep. 在……的 上方 river n. 河;江 ‎ climb vt. 爬,攀爬,攀登 into prep. 到……里 ‎ second adj. 第二的 adv. 第二 n. 第二(个) (月的)第二日 ‎ child n. 孩子,儿女 quiet adj. 安静的 ‎ rain vi. 下雨 n. 雨, 雨水 while conj. 当……的时候 ‎ sitting room 起居室, 客厅 its adj. 它的 ‎ fifth n. 第五(个); (月的)第五日 adj. 第五的 adv. 第五 ‎ garden n. 花园;菜园 flat n. 公寓,套房 ‎ seventh adj. 第七的 adv. 第七 n. 第七(个) (月的)第七日 street n. 街 , 街道 share vt. 合用; 分享 ‎ neighbour n. 邻居 friendly adj. 友好的 dining room n. 餐厅 grow vt. 种,种植 vi.生长;成长;变成 most adj. 大多数的 cook v. 烹调,煮 n. 厨师 ‎ more than 超过 多于 armchair n. 扶手椅 bedside table 床头柜 coffee n. 咖啡 ‎ coffee table 矮茶几 lamp n. 台灯 bookcase n. 书架;书柜 shower n. 淋浴器 淋浴间 淋浴 bathroom n. 浴室 ; 盥洗室 bath n. 浴缸 淋浴 toilet n. 便池; 抽水马桶 between prep. 在……之间 chalk n. 粉笔 tidy adj. 整洁的 zero num. 零 sixteen num. 十六 seventeen num. 十七 nineteen num. 十九num. num. ‎ seventy num. 七十 ninety num. 九十 thousand num. 千 million num. 百万 third … fourth … ninth … eleventh … twelfth … twentieth …‎ arrive vi. 到达 worry vi. 担心,发愁 video n. 录象 at least 至少 ground floor (英)一楼 other adj. 其他的 ; 另外的 metre n. 米,公尺 above prep. 在……的上面 below prep. 在……的下面 B). 词形转换 ‎ dream —— dreamed,dreamt ——dreamed,dreamt sea —— see（同音词） wooden(adj.) —— wood(n.) over —— under (反义词) quiet adj. 安静的—— quite adv.相当,十分 rain( vi. n.) — rainy(adj.) ‎ ‎ real (adj.)——really (adv) tidy (adj.) —— untidy (opp.) worry—— worried (adj.) friend(n.) ——friendly (adj.) love ( v. ) ——lovely (adj.) live ( v. )—— lively (adj) grow ( v. )——growth (n.) cook( v. ) —— cook (n.) print ( v. )—— printer (n.) shelf(n.) —— shelves (pl.) Fance (n.)——French (adj.) own (adj.) ——own (v.) ——owner (n.) ‎ sound (lv.) 听起来 , lisen(to) 听 vi. , hear vt. 听见，听到 ‎ 记忆下面的基数词和序数词 : one —— first two —— second three —— third ‎ five —— fifth nine —— ninth twelve —— twelfth twenty ——- twentieth ‎ 二、重点短语 live in a palace 住在宫殿里 ‎ next to 紧挨着 在隔壁 the biggest palace 最大的宫殿 ‎ the capital of Fance 法国的首都 on the beach 在海滩上 ‎ play games 玩游戏 chat with sb. 和某人聊天 ‎ sit on the floor 坐在地板上 look out at/of... 向外看…… 向……外看 ‎ wooden house 木头房子 live with my family 和我的家人住在一起 ‎ over a river 在河上 clime a ladder 爬梯子 ‎ get into 进入 rain (v.) a lot 下很多雨 ‎ much rain (n.) 很多雨水 in the kitchen 在厨房里 ‎ make/cook dinner 做饭菜 sitting room 起居室 ‎ on the fifth floor 在六楼(英) ‎ in the centre of Moscow 在莫斯科的中心 ‎ on the first/ground floor 在一楼(美/英) share...with... 与……分享,共同使用 ‎ on the balcony 在阳台上 on the shelf 在书架上 ‎ can't wait to do sth. 迫不及待做某事 take sb. to sw. 带某人去某处 ‎ speak to sb. 和某人说话 thank sb. for (doing) sth. 感谢某人(做)某事 ‎ be different from... 与……不同 telephone number 电话号码 ‎ dream home 理想家园 ‎ dream of… 梦想…… ‎ at least 至少 my own bedroom 我自己的卧室 ‎ swimming pool 游泳池 take/have a shower 淋浴 ‎ at the same time 同时 in front of 在……前面 三．重点语句 ‎1.Would you like to live in a palace?   Would like to do sth 想要做某事 2.It rains(vi.)a lot here   =There is a lot of rain(n.) here 3.The balcony is the best place to grow flowers     动词不定式短语作后置定语.   eg. I have nothing to eat . 4.We love to sit on the floor and look out at the beach and the sea .   a. on the floor 介词短语作地点状语      介词短语也可作表语eg.We are in the classroom.   b.look out 此处是向外看.     此短语也单独用，意思“小心，当心”   eg. Look out! The ice may be too thin. 5.I share a bedroom with my sister.   share...with.. 与.....分享....   eg.share a cake with Kate. 6.I can't wait to see you.‎ can't wait to do sth. 迫不及待做某事 7.I have a computer room on theground floor.‎ on the ground floor 在一楼（英国用法） 而美国一楼为 first floor. 英美相差一楼层. 8.I have a room with twelve showers and four baths.   with 带有 9.Thank you for the video of you house. thank.....for.... ‎ ‎ 有时for后也可接动词（v.ing）  eg. Thank you for helping me.‎ 四、语法要点 ‎1. 地点介词的用法 ‎　我们使用地点介词来表示事物或人所在的位置。通常用疑问词 “where”　进行提问。用法如下:‎ ‎　 1) 通常作状语: e.g.‎ 米莉坐在我的前面。　 Millie sits in front of me. ‎ 我住在桑迪隔壁。　 I live next to Sandy.‎ ‎ 2) 用作表语: e.g.‎ 小桌子在床和橱柜之间。 The small table is between the bed and the wardrobe.‎ 窗户在门的对面。　 The window is oppsite the door. ‎ ‎ 3) 作定语,放在名词后面: e.g.‎ 床底下的书 the book under the bed 教室里的学生 the students in the classroom ‎2. 基数词和序数词的用法。 ‎ ‎ 我们在许多事情上都可以用基数词。我们需要注意基数词的读法。‎ 我们用序数词来表示事情或事件的顺序，用他们来谈论日期，楼层，结果等。修饰名词时要用定冠词 “the”。‎ 一般来说在基数词后加 ‘-th’ 构成序数词。注意一下特殊变化：‎ a) 特殊变化 e.g. one → first two → second three → third ‎ b) 以 ‘ve’ 结尾的词，把 ‘ve’ 变成‘f’加 ‘th’ e.g. five → fifth twelve → twelfth c) 以 ‘e’ 结尾的词，去 ‘e’ 加 ‘th’ e.g. nine → ninth d) 以 ‘y’ 结尾的词，把 ‘y’ 变成 ‘ie’ 加 ‘th’ e.g. twenty → twentieth ‎ e.g. 1) 饭店在九楼。 The restaurant is on the ninth floor. ‎ ‎ 2) 米莉在英语考试中取得了第一。 Mille came first in the English exam. ‎ ‎ 3) 我们正在学第二十课。 We are learning Lesson Twenty.‎ We are learning the Twentieth Lesson. ‎ ‎ 4) 用英语表达数字2, 398, 476 two million , three hundred and ninety-eight thousand ,four hundred and seventy-six ‎ 四，话题作文 ‎ 本单元的话题作文是理想家园。通过本单元的学习，学生应会用英语描述自己家的情况。‎ 一般应包括以下内容：‎ 位于何处；是公寓（flat）还是房子（house）；大小如何；家的布局如kitchen, sitting room bedroom, balcony等，以及在这些地方自己能干什么事。（详见课本P22）‎ ‎ (范文)‎ ‎ My dream home is a big house in the countryside.There is much fresh air there. My home is very beautiful . My home has three floors.On each floor there is a kitchen, a sitting room, a bedroom and a balcony.I can read on the balcony. I often read and do my homework in my bedroom. In front of my house there is a big garden.I water flowers in it after school. There is also a river beside my house.I can fish there.I often ask my friends to play games in my house.I love my house very much.‎ ‎7B Unit2 知识梳理 一. 重点单词 A）.四会单词 none pron. 没有一个(人或物) order vt.叫或点（饭菜、饮料等）‎ life n.生活；生命；人生；生物 underground n. 地铁 less adj. 较少的，更少的 air n. 空气；大气 pollution n. 污染 than comj. 比 country adj. 乡村（的） lake n. 湖 building n. 建筑物，楼房 close adj. 近的 exanrple n. 例子；榜样 far adv.&adj. 远（的）‎ hey int. 嘿，喂 shop vi. 买东西 until prep. 直到……时候，直到……为止 try vt.&vi. 试；试用；试做；试图；努力 western adj. 西方的；西部的 theatre n. 剧院；电影院 teach vt. 教 land n. 土地；陆地 state n. 状态，情形 dirty adj. 脏的 play n. 戏剧 away adv. 离开，向远处 waiter n. （男）侍者 shopper n. 购物者，顾客 sick adj. 患病的；不舒服的 hospital n. 医院 learn wi.&vt. 学习 count vt.&v. 数，点数 ham n. 火腿 fork n. 叉子 plate n. 盘子 will modal verd （过去式would）将，将会 ‎ shall modal verb （过去式would）将，将会（用于第一人称 postcard n. 明信片 key ring 钥匙环 hold v t. 举行；托住，拿着 prepare vt. 准备 miss vt. 错过 golden adj. 金制的；金色的 tomorrow adv. 在明天 student n. 交换留学生 leave vi. 离开 vt. 离开；使处于某种状态 full adj. 完整的；满的；吃饱了的 ride vt. 骑（马自行车等）‎ bicycle n. 自行车 around prep. 在……周围 home towen n. 家乡 warm adj. 暖和的，温暖的 sunny adj. 晴朗的；阳光充足的 B). 词形转换 ‎ life (n.)—lives(pl.) live (n.) — lives (三单)‎ little — less — least build (v.) — building (n.)‎ like v. 喜欢 prep. 像 far—farther—furthest west (n.) — western (adj.) teach (v.) — teacher (n.)‎ dirt (n.) — dirtg (adj.) play ( v.) 扮演 ( n.)戏剧 wait (v.) — waiter (n.) chips 常用复数 loaf (n.) — loaves (pl.) hold—held—held ‎ gold (n.) — golden (adj.) paint (v.) — painting (n.)‎ leave (v.) — leaves (三单) leaf (n.) — leaves (pl.)‎ ride — rode — ridden sun (n.) — sunny (adj.)‎ 二、重点短语 welcome to 欢迎到 ‎ in the same building 在同一幢楼里 a tin of dog food 一听狗食 ‎ on the ninth floor 在十楼(英)‎ how much money/time 多少钱/时间 ‎ need help with 需要帮助…… ‎ none of ……一个没有 ‎ pay a little money付点钱 order a pizza 订个比萨 ‎ pay…for… 付……多少钱 enjoy playing badminton 喜欢打羽毛球 ‎ western restaurant 西式餐馆 take…to… 带……去…… ‎ local theatre 当地的剧院 shopping mall 大买场 ‎ enjoy Beijing opera 喜欢京剧 sports centre 运动中心 ‎ never mind 没关系 go to the cinema 去看电影 ‎ ‎15 loaves of bread 15块面包 tell sb about sh. 告诉某人关于某事 ‎ what else 别的什么 by underground 乘地铁 ‎ a carton of milk 一盒牛奶 air pollution 空气污染 ‎ ‎3 kilos of vegetables 3公斤蔬菜 In other areas of … 在……别的地方 ‎ belong to 属于 country park/music 乡村公园/音乐 ‎ plan to do sth 计划做某事 go walking/swimming 去散步/游泳 ‎ hold a welcome party 举行一个欢迎会 most of us 我们中的大多数 ‎ exchange students 交换留学生 be close to 靠近 ‎ prepare…for… 为……准备……‎ for example 例如 ‎ have a good time = have fun 玩得愉快 works of art 艺术作品 ‎ chinese paintings 中国画 the Palace Musaum 故宫 ‎ sound great 听起来很棒 enjoy a full day 享受一整天 ‎ go into the centre of town 进入镇中心 show sb. around sp. 带领某人参观某处 ‎ buy…for… 花……买……‎ the youth centre 青少年活动中心 三．重点语句 ‎1, How much money do we have?‎ ‎ 你有多少钱?‎ How much修饰不可数名词 ‎ e.g. how much milk， how much food ‎2, How many tins of dog food can we buy with that?‎ ‎ 你能用那买多少狗食？‎ How many修饰可数名词 e.g. how many desks with意思是“用” e.g. we see with our eyes.‎ ‎3, It takes 40 minutes to walk from SunshineTown to the centre of Beijing ‎ 步行从阳光镇到北京市中心要花40分钟。‎ It takes sb.st. to do sth. (某人)花费一段时间去做某事 e.g. It took the workers 2 years to build the bridge.‎ ‎ it的用法小结：‎ a It is two kibmetres from my home to the park.‎ ‎　 从我家倒公园两公里。‎ It is an hour from my home to the park on foot.‎ 步行从我家到公园一小时。‎ How far is it from your school to the post office? ‎ ‎ 从你学校到邮局有多远？‎ ‎　b.　How sunny it is today!‎ 今天的天气多么晴朗啊！ ‎ c. It’s fun to visit in Sunshine Town.‎ ‎ 参观阳光城很有趣。　　‎ ‎4, You can shop until ten o’clock at night in most shopping malls ‎ 在大多数大卖场你可以购物到晚上十点。‎ until… 直到… 主语动词用持续性动词。‎ e.g. we often do our homework until 9 o’clock every evening.‎ ‎ not …until… 直到…才… 主语not否定的动词是短暂性动词 e.g. He did go to bed until his mother got home.‎ ‎5, Why don’t you visit our local theatre with us?‎ ‎ 你为什么不和我们一起参观当地剧院呢？‎ Why don’t you …? =why not…？‎ 此二句型表提建议，后均接动词原形。‎ ‎6， what else do you want to buy?‎ ‎ 你想买别的什么吗/‎ else 常用在不定代词或特殊疑问词后 eg: someone else，where else ‎7, They do not have to go far if they need help with their homework ‎ 如果他们做家课需要帮助，他们不必走太远。‎ not have to = needn’t 意思“不必”‎ 四、语法要点 ‎1. How much 与How many 的意思是“多少” 。‎ 两者都表示询问事物的数量，区别是,How much 是询问不可数名词的数量,而How many 则是询问可数名词的数量。‎ How much meat(肉) do you need?‎ 你需要多少肉?‎ How many potatoes do you need?‎ 你需要多少土豆?‎ 注意 ：当不可数名词前有量词表示数量时,则用how many 询问多少。‎ How many kilos of meat do you need?‎ 你需要多少公斤的肉?‎ How many tins of dog food can we buy with that?‎ ‎ 你能用那买多少狗食？‎ ‎2. “no” 和 “none” 的用法 ‎ 我们使用“no” 和 “none” 来说明什么东西都没有。“no” 是一个形容词必须跟名词连用。 “none”是一个代词，不能跟名词连用。‎ ‎ e. g. A: Hello, Daniel. Is there any bread on the table? ‎ ‎ B: No, there is no bread, mum. ‎ ‎ A: What about chips? How many are there? B: There are none. ‎ ‎ A: Are there any eggs? B: No, there are no eggs, either. ‎ ‎ A: I guess there is nothing on the table now. B: Yes, you are right. ‎ ‎3. 定冠词“the”的用法小结：‎ ‎ 当表示独一无二的事物，或以前已经谈到的事或者表示说话者和听说者都已经知道这个人或事时，我们用定冠词“the” , 有时“the” 还与一定的专有名词连用。‎ ‎ e.g. the Graet Wall the capital of China ‎ There is a country park. The park is big.‎ ‎ We should be polite to the old.‎ ‎ 4. 请同学们记住形容词性物主代词和名词性物主代词对照表，用法略。‎ my—— mine our —— ours ‎ your ——yours ‎ his—— his her —— hers its—— its 五. 话题作文：          本单元的话题是阳光镇的情况，课本介绍了阳光镇的位置，人们的居住情况，中国食品，京剧等，通过本单元的学习，学生应能用英语描述自己的家乡概况（参照课本P40）‎ ‎(范文)‎ Star Town is new and modern. It’s about forty miuntes from the centre of Beijing by underground. There’s less air pallutiom there than in other areas. People there like it because they’re close to their friends. they can help each other.Star Shopping Mall is their favourite. You can shop until ten o’clock..You can choose any thing you like. There are lots of western trestaurants there,too. If you like Beijing Opera, you can go to the local theatre. People there can teach you to sing. Star Town is a great place to live in. Welcome to Star Town.‎ ‎7B Unit 3 知识梳理 一．词形转换 ‎1.north n.——northern adj. 2. east n. ——eastern adj.‎ ‎3.south n. —— southern adj. 4. west n.. ——Western adj.‎ ‎5.ring vi.——rang ——rung 6. rob v .—— roober robbery n.‎ ‎7.drive vt.vi. ——drove driven 8.quick adj. ——quickly adv.‎ ‎9.knife n. ——pl. knives 10.stop vt.vi. ——stopped stopping ‎11.report vt.vi. n. —— reporter 12.sudden n.—— suddenly adv.‎ ‎13.surprise n. —— surprised adj. 14.mean vt. ——meaning n. meaningful adj. ‎ ‎15.happy adj. ——happily adv. 16.enter v. —— entrance n.‎ ‎17.correct adj. ——correctly adv. 18.cross v. —— across prep. ‎ ‎19.win vt.vi. ——n. winner 20. cloud n. —— cloudy adj . 21.bring vt.——brought brought 22.jump vi. —— jumper n.‎ 四会单词 ‎ 1.way n. 路，路线 2.follow vt. 跟随 ‎ 3.down adv. Prep.向下 4.afraid adj.害怕 ‎ 5.north n. 北方 6.east n.东方 ‎ 7.south n.南方 8.twin adj.双胞胎的 ‎ 9.police n. 警察 10. uniform n.警服 ‎ 11.push vt.推 12.away adv.离开 ‎ 13.fail vt. 失败 14.knife n.餐刀 ‎ 15.again adv. 再，又 16.work vi.起作用 ‎ 17.station n. 所，局 18. route n. 路径 ‎ 19.along prep. 沿着 20. road n.路 ‎ 21.another adj. 另一个 22.note n.笔记 ‎ 23. smile vi.微笑 24.open adj.开着的 ‎ 25.move v. 移动 26. crossroads n.十字路口 ‎ 27.straight adj. 直的 28.museum n.博物馆 ‎ 29.corner n. 拐角 30.cross vt.穿过 ‎ 31.across prep.穿过 32.through prep.穿过 ‎ 33. round prep.环绕 34.pool n.水池 ‎ 35.stair n. 楼梯 36.step n.台阶 ‎ 37.bridge n. 桥 38.join vt.加入 ‎ 39.gate n. 大门 40.cloudy adj.‎ ‎ 41.paper adj. n.纸，纸质的 42. path n.小路 ‎ 43.towards prep.朝，向 44.market n.市场 ‎ 45.monitor n. 班长 46.bank n.银行 二、重点短语 ‎1.follow sb.to... 跟随某人去 ‎ ‎2.be afraid of doing sth 害怕做某事 ‎3.ring sb=give sb a ring 给某人电话 ‎ ‎4.driv sb to… 用车送某人 5.at once 立刻，马上 ‎ ‎6.fail to do sth 失败做某事 ‎7.the police station 警察局 ‎ ‎8.another ＋数词 ＋名词复数 ‎ ‎9.stop to do sth 停下来做某事 stop doing sth停止做某事 ‎10.be surprised to do sth 很惊讶的做某事 to one’s surprise 令某人很惊讶 ‎11.smile at sb 对某人微笑 ‎ ‎12.laugh at sb 嘲笑某人 ‎13.across the street 穿过街道 ‎ ‎14.through the tunnell 穿过隧道 ‎15.bring sb.sth/bring sth to sb 把某物带给某人 ‎ ‎16. be to the north of 在……北部 ‎17.get out of their car 从小轿车里出来 ‎ ‎18.try to do sth 尽力做某事 ‎ ‎19. half of the students 一半学生 ‎ ‎21.cross the road at the traffic lights ‎ ‎20.take the second turning on the right在右面的第二个拐角处 ‎22.Walk past the police station 走过警察局 ‎ ‎23. turn right at the corner 在拐角处向右转 ‎24.look forward to doing sth 期望做某事 ‎ ‎25.turn on/off 打开/关上 turn up/down ‎ ‎26.join the party 加入这个晚会 ‎ ‎27.take part in 参加 ‎28.try to push them into…尽力把他们推进 ‎ ‎29.take dfferent rutes走不同的路线 ‎30.stop at the traffic lights 停在交通灯处 ‎ ‎31.make it move forward使它往前移动 ‎32.a set of clothes 一套衣服 ‎ ‎33.from one place to another从一处到另一处 ‎34.ask sb. not to do sth. 请某人不要做某事 ‎ ‎35.call them for help打电话给他们求救 ‎36.open the door with a knife 用刀打开门 ‎ ‎37.half of the students一半的学生 ‎38.invite sb. to do sth 邀请某人做某事 ‎ ‎39.meet at the park gate 在公园门口集合 ‎40.on Saturday afternoon 在星期六下午 ‎ ‎41.cook Chinese food做中国菜 三．重点语句 ‎ 关于问路 ‎1. Excuse me ,where is …打扰一下，……在哪儿?‎ ‎2.Can/could you tell me where … is? 你能告诉我。。。。。。在哪？‎ ‎3.Can/could you tell me the way to …? 你能告诉我去。。。。。。的路吗？‎ ‎ 4.Can/could you tell me how I can get to …?/ how to get to …? 你能告诉我怎样才能达…..‎ ‎5. Do you know the way to …? 你知道去。。。。。。的路吗？‎ ‎6.I’m lost. Can you show me the way to …? 我迷路了。你可以展示给我去。。。。。。的路？‎ ‎7.Which is the way to …? 去。。。。。。的路是哪一条？‎ 告诉对方如何走的句式：‎ ‎1.Go (walk) along (down) this road (street) 沿着这条路/街走 ‎2.Then turn left /right at ….然后在、、、、、、地方左（右）转弯， ‎ take the second (third…)turning on the left /right. 在第二（三、、、）个拐角处左（右）转 ‎3.and you’ll see … 你将见到、、、‎ ‎4.Go straight on until / till you see. 一直走，直到你看到、、、‎ 1. Three men in police uniform are running out of the building.‎ 三个穿警服的人从这幢楼跑出去。‎ 2. I think we’ll have to go up again.‎ 我认为我们将不得不再次上去。‎ 3. The zoo is north of Beijing Sunshine Second School.‎ 这个动物园在北京阳光第二学校的北面。‎ 4. They drive to Hill Building quickly.‎ 他们迅速开去了 希尔大厦。‎ 5. They just push into the back off a green van and drive away.‎ ‎ 他们刚把Justin和 Paul 推进一辆绿色货车后面而且开走了 6. I’m going to take another route.‎ 我打算走另一条路线 7. Simon is swimming across the pool.‎ ‎ Simon 正游过这池子 8. A train is going through a tunnel.‎ 火车穿过一条隧道 9. Cross the bridge, turn right and walk straight on.‎ 穿过桥 右拐并一直往前走 10. From the road, walk across the field and you will see a big tree.‎ 沿着这条路走，穿过田地 你就会看到一棵大树。‎ 11. We are happy to invite you to a farewell party for our friends from Britain.‎ 我们很高兴邀请你们参加来自英国朋友的告别晚会。‎ 语法：‎ 1． 一般将来时的基本用法 1） 表示将来的动作或状态 ‎ e .g. There will be many people in the park.‎ 2） 表达一种意图 e . g. I don’t like that man and I will not help him.‎ 2． 一般将来时的其他表示方式 1） 用be going to +动词原形表将来要做的事 e.g. I’m going to attend a meeting.‎ 2） be about to +动词原形，表“就要”，指即将发生的动作 e.g. The meeting is about to close.‎ ‎3) be (am/is/are) +现在分词(going/coming/leaving starting/ reaching /returning dying 等)‎ ‎4）在时表将来时，表示按规定或预计将要发生的动作 e.g. Today is Saturday ,and tomorrow is Sunday.‎ 句中如果有tomorrow, next week, when spring comes; if we have time in the future 等类似的时间状语或从句，句子或主句用一般将来时。‎ 四、 书面表达 一封邀请信 （例文）‎ Class 1,Grade 7‎ Beijing Sunshine Secondary School Sunshine Town Benjing ‎20th April Dear parents,teachers and classmates We are happy to invite you to a farewell party for our friends from Britain.We will Hold the party in Sunshine Park on Saturday,26th April.from 1:00 to 6: .We will meet at the park gate. We will have a picnic in the park. We would like everybody to bring their own food and drink. We will also play different ball games.‎ The map shows you how to get to Sunshine park. We hope you can come. We look forward to seeing you at our party.‎ Yours faithfully Daniel Monitor of class 1, Grade 7‎ ‎7B Unit 4 知识梳理 一．四会单词 ‎1.yesterday (adv.) 昨天 2. bright (adj.) 明亮的 3.travel (vi.) 旅行 4. earth (n.) 地球 ‎ ‎5.moon (n.) 月亮 6.elephant (n.) 大象 ‎ ‎7. plant (n.) 植物 8.without (prep.) 没有 ‎ ‎9.lightning (n.) 闪电 10.strange (adj.) 奇怪的 ‎ ‎11.usual (adj.) 寻常的 12. hear (vt. /vi.) 听见 ‎13.whisper (n.) 低语 14.bush (n.) 灌木丛 ‎ ‎15.unusual (adj.) 不寻常的 16.frightened (adj.) 感到恐惧的 17.anybody (pron.) 任何人 18.nobody (pron.) 没有人 ‎ ‎19.carefully (adv.) 仔细地 20.noise (n.) 声音，嗓音 ‎ ‎21.happen (vi.) 发生 22.everything (pron.) 每件事，一切 23.search (vi. /vt.) 搜寻 24.himself (pron.) 他自己 ‎ ‎25.weak (adj.) 虚弱的 26.later 以后 (adv.) ‎ ‎27.following (adj.) 接下来的 28.soft (adj.) 柔软的 ‎ ‎29.last (adj.) 最后的 30.reporter (n.) 记者 ‎ ‎31. crazy (adj.) 着迷的， 狂热的 32.kick (vt.) 踢 ‎ ‎33.stone (n.) 石头 34.dislike (vt.) 讨厌， 不喜欢 ‎ ‎35.few (pron. /adj.) 少数的，少数 36.practise (vt. /vi.) 练习 ‎37.early (adv. /adj.) 早，早的 38.hard-working (adj.) 勤勉的 ‎ ‎39.guide (n.) 导游，指南 40.introduction (n.) 介绍 ‎41.pity (n) 遗憾，可惜 42. die (vi.) 死亡 ‎ ‎43.excited (adj.) 兴奋的 44. appear (vi. 出现 ‎ ‎45.however (adv.)但是 46.weigh (vi.) 称重 ‎ ‎47.grass (n.) 草 48.lay (vt.) 下蛋，产卵 ‎ ‎49.baby (n.) 婴儿 50.remember (vt.)记住 ‎ ‎51.word (n.) 单词 52.second (n.) 秒 ‎ ‎53.weight (n.) 重量 54.decide (vt. /vi.) 决定 ‎ ‎55.name ( vt.) 命名 56.invent (vt.) 发明 57.star (n.) 明星，恒星 58.history(n.历史 词形转换 ‎1. weigh vi. —— n. weight 2. lay vt. —— laid laid ‎3.baby n. —— babies 4.decide vt.vi. —— n. decision ‎5.scarf n. ——pl. scarves 6.dish n. —— (pl. dishes)‎ ‎7.wake v. —— woke woken 8.sandwich n. ——pl. sandwiches ‎9.invent vt. ——n. inventor invention 10.amazing adj. ——amazed ‎11.travel vi. —— travelling travelled 12.with prep —— without ‎13.strange adj. —— n. stranger 14.usual adj. —— unusal ‎15.hear vt.vi. ——heard heard 16.bush n.—— pl. bushes ‎17.care v——adj. careful, carefully careless 18.noise n——adj. noisy ‎19.weak adj. —— strong 20.follow v. ——following ‎21.report v.. ——n. reporter 22.dislike vt. ——hate ‎23.introduce v. ——n. introduction 24.die vi. ——n. death adj.dead ‎25.excited adj. ——exciting 26.appear vi. ——disappear ‎27. science n. ——scientist ‎ 二、重点短语 ‎1.over = more than 多于，超过 ‎ ‎2. the history of China 中国历史 ‎3. a piece of /two pieces of 一张/两张 ‎4. decide to do sth= make up one’s mind to do sth 决定做某事 make a decision 做决定 ‎5. the weight of ……的重量 ‎6. remember to do sth 记住做某事 remember doing sth 记得做过某事 ‎7. two days ago 俩天前 ‎ ‎8. a hard-working student 一个勤奋的学生 ‎ ‎9. wake sb up 叫醒某人 ‎ ‎10. dislike/hate doing sth 不喜欢做某事 ‎11.be fond of doing sth 喜欢做某事 ‎ ‎12.practise doing sth 练习做某事 ‎13. be crazy about doing sth 对做……很着迷 ‎ ‎14. the following day 第二天 ‎15.take care of /look after 照顾 ‎16. happen= take place 发生 sth happen to sb 某事发生在某人身上 happen to do sth 碰巧做某事 ‎17. on one’s way to 在去……的路上 by the way 顺便问一下 ‎ ‎ on one’s way to school 在某人去上学的路上 on one’s way home 在某人回家的路上 ‎18. keep one’s eyes open 使某人的眼睛睁着 ‎19. at the same time 在同时 at times= some times= from time to time 有时 ‎20. not…any more/longer =no more /longer 不再 ‎21.take photos /pictures 拍照片 ‎ ‎22. live up to 活到 ‎23.Thank you for doing sth 谢谢你做某事 ‎ ‎24.during one’s life 在某人一生中 ‎25. keep on doing sth 一直做某事 ‎ ‎26. be frightened ofdoing 害怕/做某事 ‎27. run away quickly 很快跑走了 run after 追赶 run out 用完，耗尽 ‎28. say to oneself 自言自语 think to oneself ‎ ‎29. show sb sth/show sth to sb 把某物给某人看 show sb. around 带领某人参观 ‎30. have a great time= enjoy oneself = have fun玩得很开心 ‎31. by rocket乘火箭 ‎ ‎32.as usual像往常一样 ‎ ‎33.at birth 在出生时 ‎ ‎34. be frightened = be afraid害怕 ‎35.turn around 转过来 ‎ ‎36.run into sb.= meet sb. 巧遇某人 ‎ ‎37. be poisonous有毒 ‎ ‎38. be full of = be filled with充满；装满… ‎ ‎39 walk on tiptoe 用脚尖走 ‎ ‎40 look after sb. well = take good care of sb. 好好照 顾某人 ‎ ‎41.the following/next Sunday (之前不放介词) 下个周日 ‎ ‎42.be fond of music爱好音乐 be fond of listening to music爱好听音乐 ‎43.it sounds/sounded like… 听上去像… ‎ ‎44. practise doing sth 练习做某事 ‎45.take turns to do sth 轮流做某事 ‎ ‎46. fact sheet 资料单 ‎ ‎47return sth to sb = give sth. back to sb. 把某物还给某人 ‎48.key ring 钥匙扣 ‎ ‎49.the weight of an elephant大象的体重 ‎50.belong to sb. (sb用宾格) 属于某人 ‎ ‎51. live up to 150 years一直活150年 ‎ 二、重点句子及句型：‎ ‎1.Do you know that fish sleep with their eyes open?你知道吗鱼是睁着眼睛睡觉的？‎ ‎2.You cannot sneeze and keep your eyes open at the same time.‎ 你做不到在打喷嚏的同时睁着眼睛。‎ ‎3.There’s no plant life without lightning.没有闪电就没有植物的生命。‎ ‎4.Is anybody there?有人在那里吗？‎ ‎5.Millie told Andy everything.米莉把一切都告诉了安迪。‎ ‎6.They were still frightened.他们仍然感到害怕。‎ ‎7.They were surprised to see the “ghost”.他们很惊讶看到这个“鬼”.‎ ‎8.They were not afraid of animals any more.他们再也不害怕动物了。‎ ‎9.Simon is crazy about football.西蒙对足球很狂热。‎ ‎10.Sandy is fond of music.桑迪喜欢音乐。‎ ‎11.There were very few foods that Millie dislikes.几乎没有米莉不喜欢的食物。‎ ‎12.What a beautiful flower it is!==How beautiful the flower is!多美的花啊！‎ ‎13.One frog like this has enough poison to kill about 2200 people.这样的一只青蛙有足够的毒液可以杀死大约两千两百人。‎ ‎14.A baby panda is only 100 grams at birth.初生的大熊猫只有一百克左右。‎ ‎15.The most dangerous animal is the mosquito.最危险的动物是蚊子。‎ ‎16.A kangaroo needs its tail for pushing off.袋鼠需要它的尾巴来推离（地面）。‎ ‎17.The tallest man in history was 2.6m tall.历史上最高的人有2.6米。‎ ‎18.Snakes “hear” with their tongues.蛇用舌头来“听“。‎ ‎19.Does this calendar belong to Daniel?这本日历是丹尼尔的吗？‎ ‎20.My friends found it interesting too.我的朋友们也发现它很有趣。‎ ‎21.I cannot believe that a tortoise can live up to 150 years.‎ ‎22.It’s interesting to know that each eye of a camel has 3 eyelids.‎ ‎23.I now understand why my mother always tells me to clean the table after a meal.‎ ‎24.Ants can smell things as well as dogs can.蚂蚁的嗅觉像狗的一样灵敏。‎ ‎25.It says that goldfish can only remember things for three seconds.‎ ‎26.They don’t know what happened to them three seconds ago.‎ ‎27.It’s said that we eat about 27000 kilos of food during our lives.据说我们一生可以吃掉大约27000千克的食物。‎ ‎28.That’s the weight of about six elephants.那可是大概六头大象的重量。‎ ‎29.Thank you for your help.== Thank you for helping me.谢谢你的帮助。‎ ‎30.The world is full of amazing things. 世界充满令人惊奇的事。‎ 三、语法：‎ 1. 感叹句型：‎ What+a/an+形容词+可数名词单数+(主谓)！ What a nice flower (it is)!‎ ‎ What an interesting film (it is) !‎ What+形容词+可数名词复数+(主谓)！ What beautiful flowers (they are)!‎ What+形容词+不可数名词+(主谓)！ What bad weather (it is)!‎ How+形容词/副词/陈述+(主谓)！ How nice the flower is!‎ ‎ How fast he runs!‎ ‎ How time flies!‎ 1. 形容词性物主代词和名词性物主代词、名词所有格。‎ This calendar belongs to me.‎ ‎==This calendar is mine.‎ ‎== This is my calendar.‎ 2. 一般过去时 （1） 基本用法 a) 表示过去的动作或存在的状态 ‎ Eg. He bought a car yesterday.‎ ‎ Tom was a student two years ago.‎ b) 表示过去连续发生的行为 Eg.Jack got up,had breakfast and then went to school.‎ c) 表示过去一段时间内经常发生的动作 Eg.When I was at school, I always went to school by bus.‎ （2） 其它用法 Used to + 动词原形 表示过去经常做某事，但是现在不做 Eg. I used to play fotball after school.‎ ‎ 注意：时间状语 yesterday , last week /month /year, in+过去时间 （ in 1998） , …ago ‎ ‎ ( two days ago / three months ago ) Just now /then ‎7 B Unit 5 知识梳理 一. ‎ 重点单词：‎ 四会：plant 动词, 种植 brave 形容词 , 勇敢的 seat 名词, 座位；动词：sit leg名词, 腿 arm名词, 胳膊 pour 动词, 倒 ‎ blanket名词, 毯子 month名词, 月 call 动词： 喊，叫 ；打电话 terrible形容词：可怕的；糟糕的 award 名词，奖 ；奖品；奖金 ‎ row 动词， 划船 （rowing） term 名词，学期 geography地理 grade 名词，成绩； 年级 result 名词，结果 problem 名词，问题 madam 女士；夫人 housework 家务活（不可数名词）‎ 三会： host主持人 stove 火炉 ski 滑雪 skiing ‎ ‎ chairperson主席 whole 整个的 二会： personality个性 thoughtful 考虑周到的 (动词)think drama 戏剧 ‎ racket 球拍 重难点单词及拓展 ‎1. ability （名词）能力 复数abilities ‎ ‎2.match（名词）火柴 复数matches ‎3.danger（名词）危险 (形)dangerous ‎ ‎4. smoke（动词）吸烟 （名词）smoke烟 ‎5.safe(形) 安全的 （名词） safety；(副词) safely ‎ ‎6. visitor（名词）探望者；游者 （动词） visit ‎ ‎7.collect（动词）收集 （名词） collection ‎ ‎8.snow（名词）雪 （动词）snow 下雪 ；(形)snowy 有雪的 ‎9. cheerful(形)令人快乐的；快乐的 （动词）cheer ‎ ‎10.like （动词）喜欢； 介词）像 likely (副词) 可能 ‎11.hurt使受伤；伤害 过去式---过去分词 hurt---hurt ‎ ‎12. burn烧伤；烧 过去式---过去分词burned /burnt---burned/ burnt ‎13.fall—fell---fallen put---put----put. give---gave---given ‎ ‎14.forget（动词）忘记 过去式---过去分词forgot—forgotten ‎15. polite有礼貌的 反义词impolite / rude possible—impossible correct—incorrect , ‎ active—inactive, helpful—unhelpful, ‎ kind—unkind happy---unhappy, ‎ grateful—ungrateful careful—careless, brave—afraid ‎ ‎16.alone, (副词)、 (形)独自；单独=by oneself= on one’s own ‎17. rush, 动词 冲；奔 =run very quickly ‎18. save动词 救；救助 ；节省、节约 ‎19. glad, 形容词 高兴的= happy be glad to do sth 很高兴做某事 ‎20. oneself 代词 自己 ‎ myself（我自己） yourself 你自己 himself他自己 herself她自己 ‎ ourselves 我们自己 yourselves你们自己 themselves他们自己 ‎ ‎21. lose 动词）迷失；丢失 过去式---过去分词lost 名词loss ‎ ‎22.elderly形容词：较老的；上年纪的（old的比较级） the elderly 老年人 ‎23.quick形容词：快的 副词quickly 反义词 slow ‎ ‎24. recommend 动词：推荐 recommend sb as/ to be--- 推荐某人为---‎ ‎25. member 名词， 成员 a member of--- ---的成员 ‎26. writing 名词，写作 动词 write (wrote written), writer (作家)‎ ‎27. piano 名词，钢琴 play the piano ‎28. memory 名词， 记忆力 复数memories 二．重点短语 ‎1.be careful ( with sth) 当心--- ‎ ‎2.give one’s seat to sb 给某人让座 ‎ e.g. It’s good to give our seat to the elderly on the bus. ‎ ‎3.have different abilities 有不同的能力 ‎ e.g. All of us have different abilities. ‎ ‎4.be grateful to sb for sth 因---感激某人 The boy’s mother is very grateful to me for my help. 那个男孩的妈妈很感激我的帮助。‎ ‎5.clean up sth (名词)=clean sth up 把…打扫干净 ‎ e.g. The workers are cleaning up the park now.‎ ‎6.clean it /them up 把…打扫干净 e.g. The classroom is so dirty. Let’s clean it up. ‎ ‎7.a home for the elderly 养老院 ‎ ‎8.play the piano well =be good at playing the piano 钢琴弹得好 ‎9.a 25-year-old man一个25岁的人 an 8-year-old boy 一个八岁的男孩 ‎ ‎10.help sb out of sw 帮助某人从某处出来 ‎11.be at home= be in= be not out 在家 ‎ ‎12.hear sb doing sth 听到某人正在做某事 e.g. I heard Lucy singing the next room a moment ago.‎ ‎13.hear sb do sth 听到某人做了某事 ‎ e.g. We often hear him read English in the morning. ‎ ‎14.hurt one’s leg 伤了腿 e.g. Tom fell off the bike and hurt his left leg.‎ ‎15.Sth happens to sb 某人发生了某事 ‎ e.g. Something terrible happened to Mrs Sun last night. ‎ ‎16.what happened to sb? 某人发生了什么事?‎ e.g. What is happening to you? Your finger is bleeding. 你怎么了？你的手指在流血。‎ ‎17.sb happens to do sth 某人碰巧做某事 ‎ ‎18.ran to sb / sw 跑向某人/某地 ‎19.pour water over sth 用水浇透某物 ‎ ‎20.rush into sw 冲进某地 e.g. The firemen rushed into the burning house and saved the girl.‎ ‎21.put out the fire 扑灭火 ‎ ‎ e.g. He put out the fire with water. 他用氺扑灭了火。 ‎ ‎22.burn one’s neck 烧伤脖子 ‎23.bring sth to sb=bring sb sth 把某物给某人 ‎ e.g. Tom, bring me my lunch please. 汤姆，请把我的午餐拿来。‎ ‎24.help each other 互相帮助 ‎25.learn from each other 互相学习 ‎ ‎26.keep sb / sth away from-- 使…远离---‎ ‎27.save sb 救人 save one’s life e.g. A doctor’s job is to save people’s lives. ‎ ‎28.save money 节约钱 ‎29.(be ill )in hospital 生病住院 e.g. He has been ill in hospital for two months. ‎ ‎30.in the hospital 在这家医院（工作等）‎ ‎31.be afraid of (doing) sth 害怕(做)--- ‎ I’m afraid of flying. 我害怕坐飞机。 ‎ ‎32.hear from sb 收到某人来信 e.g. I haven’t heard from my sister since last term.自上学期以来我就没收到我姐姐的来信。‎ ‎33.call for help 呼救 ‎ ‎34.ask sb for help 向某人寻求帮助 ‎35.leave the stove on 让炉子燃着 ‎ ‎36.put sth into sth 把…放进…里 ‎37.would like to do sth 想要做某事 ‎ ‎38.recommend sb for sth 推荐某人获得…‎ ‎39.recommend sb as /to be--- 推荐某人做----‎ e.g. We’d like to recommend Jack as our monitor. 我们想推荐杰克做班长。 ‎ ‎40.fall down 跌倒，落下 fell ‎41.cross the street 横穿马路 ‎ ‎42. go across the road过马路 ‎ ‎43.in the past 在过去 ‎ ‎44.row a boat 划船 ‎45.ride a bicycle 骑自行车 ‎ ‎46.have a good memory 记忆力好 ‎47. more often 更常 ‎ ‎48.work hard at sth 努力学习…‎ ‎49.know a lot about 对…知道很多 ‎ ‎50.do/try one’s best to do sth 尽力做某事 We should do our best to learn English.‎ ‎51.have good grades in English 成绩好 ‎ ‎52.never mind 不要紧 ‎53.mind (one’s/ sb) doing sth 介意某人做某事 e.g.‎ Do you mind my sitting here? Of course not. /Not at all. / You’d better not. It’s for Mr Li.‎ ‎54.No problem。 没问题。‎ ‎---Could you help me with my Maths? ---- No problem.‎ ‎55.lose one’s way /get lost 迷路 ‎56.teach sb how to do sth 教某人怎样做某事 ‎ e.g. I’ll teach you how to search for information on the Internet. ‎ ‎57.on one’s way to school 在某人上学路 e.g. On my way to school, I saw a boy crying in the street.‎ ‎58.on one’s way home 在某人回家路上 ‎59.look forward to doing sth 盼望做某事 ‎ e.g. We are all looking for to having a party. ‎ ‎60.the police station 警察局 ‎61.a drama show 戏剧演出 ‎ ‎62.snow heavily 下大雪 ‎ e.g. She couldn’t fly her kite because it snowed heavily yesterday afternoon ‎63.jump high跳得很高 ‎ ‎64.have a geography class上地理课 ‎65.two pieces of advice 两条建议 ‎66. do too much housework 干太多家务 e.g. My mother does too much housework all day. ‎ ‎67.think of others first 先想到别人 ‎68.be able to do sth 能够做某事 e.g. She was able to walk when she was eight months old.‎ ‎69.get an award得奖 ‎ ‎70. a lot of smoke许多烟 三．句型 1. What a brave young man! 多勇敢的人啊！‎ 2. How clever! 多聪明呀！How terrible! 太可怕了！‎ 3. Suddenly, he heard someone calling for help.突然他听到有人呼救。‎ 4. She couldn’t get out because she hurt her legs.因为伤到腿她出不来。‎ 5. She put out the fire with a blanket and helped Mrs Li out.‎ 她用毯子扑灭了火把李太太救出来 6. It’s important to be careful with fire. 小心用火很重要。‎ 7. Thank you for joining us. 谢谢你加入我们。‎ 8. Did you do anything to keep yourself safe? 你采取措施保护自己安全了吗？‎ 9. Fire can be dangerous if we are not careful. 如果我们不当心火可能会很危险。‎ 1. I’d like to recommend Daniel for this year’s award. 我想推荐Daniel获得今年奖项。‎ 2. That sounds good. 听起来不错。‎ 3. How long did you stay in hospital after the fire? For two months 4. Many visitors brought him flowers and presents.许多探望者带给他花和礼物 5. I’m happy that he is well again. 我很高兴他又恢复健康。‎ 6. We will all be very happy if Daniel can have the award.‎ 7. Don’t leave the stove on. 不要火炉开着。‎ 8. Do not put anything hot into the rubbish bin. 不要把热东西放进垃圾箱。‎ 9. Keep long hair away from the fire. 使长发远离火。‎ 10. Last year Sandy could not ride the bike, but now she can.‎ 11. Anything could happen to her at that time. 那时任何事情都可能发生在她身上。‎ 12. Suzy has a good memory and is good at writing. Suzy记忆力好并擅长写作。‎ 13. She must read English more often and use more often.她必须更经常读，用英语 14. He has good grades in Chinese. 他语文成绩好。‎ 15. She can get better results if she does her best. 她如果尽力成绩会更好。‎ 16. Daniel saw a boy crying when he was on his way to school.‎ 17. 感叹句: 结构 a. What+ (a/ an)+ adj.+名词+（s + v）! (不可数和复数名词前不能用a/an)‎ e.g. What a clever boy he is! What an interesting book (it is)!‎ ‎ What bad weather (it is)! (weather不可数名词)‎ ‎ What beautiful girls (they are)! (girls复数名词)‎ b. How + adj./ adv.（+s + v）！‎ e.g. How fine the weather is! How cool he looks！‎ ‎ How quickly Tom is running!‎ ‎ 7 B Unit 6 知识梳理 一．单词 ‎ 四会：pet rabbit hold feed catch wide hunt hide build camp bite fight end trouble anywhere middle drawer empty fit care doorbell might feather tail wing knock repeat herself sun cage full pull brush tank fur necessary once clean bottom talk speaker shy basket slowly ‎ 三会parrot lap chase stick edge frighten owner fantail pea noisy string lead sign shell 理解以下单词： bubble hutch window ledge cardboard frock rhyme fin paw ‎ 重难点单词及拓展 ‎1. feed vt. (及物动词) 喂；喂养 （feed-fed-fed ） ‎ ‎2. hold vt. (及物动词) 托住，握住，拿着 ; 举行 （hold-held-held）‎ ‎3. catch vt. (及物动词)捉住；赶上；染上 （catch-caught-caught）‎ catch a mouse捉住一只老鼠 catch the thief抓住小偷 catch the early bus 赶上早班车 ‎ catch up with sb赶上某人 catch a cold 得感冒 ‎ ‎4. wide 作副词：张大地 ‎ e.g. Open your mouth wide, please. ‎ ‎ He looks around with eyes open wide ‎ 作形容词：宽的；广阔的 e.g. This river is very wide.‎ ‎5. build vt. (及物动词) 建筑，建造 名词: building 建筑物，大楼 (build- built- built ) ‎ ‎ 6. camp 作名词： 帐篷；营地 ‎ 作动词： 露营，野营 go camping 去野营 ‎7. bite 动词：咬 过去式bit、过去分词 bitten ‎8. fight 作动词：vi. (不及物动词)打仗（架） vt. (及物动词)与---打仗（架）‎ 过去式、过去分词fought-fought fight with sb与---打仗（架）‎ ‎9.end 作名词：最后，最终 ‎ in the end=at last= finally最后，最终 at the end of---- 在-----最后、 末尾、尽头 by the end of--- 到----末、为止by the end of last week 到上学期末 ‎10.trouble 名词：麻烦 have trouble with sth --有困难have trouble doing sth 做某事有困难 What’s your trouble ?= What’s the trouble /matter with you? = What’s wrong? 你怎么了？‎ ‎11. anywhere副词：任何地方 somewhere某地 ‎12. empty形容词：空的 an empty box 一个空盒子 反义词： full ‎13. care 作动词：vi. (不及物动词)介意，在乎 ‎ care about sth/sb在意/在乎---- care for sb 关心/照顾某人 作名词：take care of sb 关心/照顾某人 其形容词：careful 副词carefully ‎14. might 情态动词 may的过去式 但有时不表过去 ‎15. knock 动词 ：敲，撞，碰 knock at /on the door敲门 ‎16. full 形容词：吃饱了的；满的 反义词：empty空的 hungry饥饿的 e.g. I’m full. 我饱了。‎ The basket is full of apples. 篮子里装满了苹果。‎ ‎17. brush ‎ 作名词：刷子 复数brushes 作动词：vt. (及物动词) 刷 三单brushes ‎ She brushes her dog’s fur once a day.她一天刷一次狗毛。‎ ‎18.necessary形容词：必要的 It’s necessary for you to plan your time carefully. ‎ ‎19. once 副词：一次 两次： twice 三次:three times ‎ ‎ once a year twice a week three times a day 请注意：‎ ‎ ------How many times do you go shopping every week?------- Only once ‎-------How often does your sister play basketball? ----------Twice a week.‎ ‎20. clean 作形容词：干净的 ‎ ‎ a clean room keep the classroom clean 作动词：打扫，使---干净 clean the classroom clean the window 1. bottom 名词：底，底部 at the bottom of-----在-----底部 2. speaker 名词：讲话者 动词 speak 3. ‎ frighten 动词：吓唬，使惊恐 形容词：frightened 害怕的，恐惧的 4. ‎ owner 名词：所有者，拥有者 动词： own 拥有 the owner of--- ---的主人 own a car拥有一辆汽车 5. noisy 形容词： 嘈杂的，喧闹的 The street is so noisy that I can’t hear your words.‎ How noisy it is!‎ Don’t be noisy. The baby is sleeping.‎ 名词：noise make a lot of noise发出很多噪音 ‎ 二．重点词组 ‎1. sleep a lot 多睡 ‎ ‎2. bark at sb （狗）向某人叫 ‎ ‎3.look like 看上去像— ‎ e.g. What does your sister look like? She is tall and slim.‎ ‎4. my favourite pet 我最喜爱的宠物 ‎ e.g. What’s your favourite pet? I like dogs best.‎ ‎5. pull its tail 拉它的尾巴 ‎ ‎6.pull one’s ear 拉某人的耳朵 ‎ ‎6. lie on the bed 躺在床上 ‎ ‎7.sleep on my lap 睡在我的膝上 ‎ ‎8. look after= take care of 照顾，照料 ‎ ‎9. belong to 属于 e.g. This cat belongs to my brother.=This cat is my brother’s.‎ ‎10. be crazy about (doing) sth 着迷于---‎ e.g. Lucy is crazy about listening to music.‎ ‎11. eat fish for dinner 晚餐吃鱼 ‎12. walk the dog=take the dog for a walk 遛狗 ‎13．the cleverest animal 最聪明的动物 ‎ ‎14. spend lots of time / money on / doing sth ‎ e.g. I spend an hour reading every day.‎ ‎ She spent lots of money buying / on clothes.‎ ‎15. keep the classroom clean保持教室干净 keep the fish tank clean保持鱼缸干净 ‎16. play a trick/ tricks on sb 捉弄某人 e.g. Jack likes playing tricks on others. It’s not polite, I think.‎ ‎17. look the same 看上去相同 e.g. Twins look the same. ‎ ‎ look the same as--看上去与---相同 e.g. Your pen is the same as mine.‎ ‎18. weigh 4 kilograms 重4千克 ‎ ‎19. make sure 确保 e.g. Make sure that you can arrive on time. 确保你能按时到达。‎ ‎20. not too cold or too hot 不太冷也不太热 ‎ ‎21. be different from 与---不同 e.g. This shirt is different from from that one.‎ ‎22. at the bottom of--- 在---的底部 e.g. There is a lot of sand at the bottom of the river.‎ ‎23. be easy to look after 容易照料 e.g. Cats are easy to look after. ‎ ‎24. too much food 太多的食物 eat too much 吃太多 ‎25. take enough exercise 做足够的锻炼 ‎26. once a day 一天一次 twice a week 一周两次 three times a month 一月三次 ‎27. make too much noise 发出太多噪音 be noisy 嘈杂 a noisy place 一个嘈杂的地方 ‎28. have enough time to do sth 有足够的时间做某事 ‎ ‎29. at least 至少 little-less- least ‎ e.g. There are at least 500 students in the school hall.‎ ‎30. be busy at work 忙着工作 be busy with sth 忙于做某事 be busy doing sth忙于做某事 ‎ e.g. My father is busy at work all day. Tom is busy doing his homework. ‎ ‎31. have long fur长着长长的毛 brush its fur 刷它的毛 ‎32. keep her warm 使她暖和 ‎ ‎33. feed sb sth= feed sth to sb 喂---给某人 ‎ e.g. She feeds her rabbit some carrots every day. ‎ ‎34. chase the cat=run after the cat 追赶猫 ‎35.open your mouth wide 张大你的嘴 ‎36. look around with eyes open wide 眼睛睁得大大的四处张望 ‎37. frighten sb/ sth 吓唬某人、某物 frighten the cat ‎ ‎38. be frightened of doing sth =be afraid of (doing) sth 害怕做某事 ‎39. give her a shower 给她洗澡 take/have a shower 洗澡 ‎40. get/ be tired 累 ‎ ‎41. knock at the door 敲门 ‎ ‎42. want them to be healthy 想要他们健康 ‎43．all over 遍及 all over the world 全世界 ‎44. in the middle (of) 在（----）中间 ‎ ‎45. until the end 直到最后 ‎46. in the end= at last= finally 最后，最终 ‎47. at the end of the road 在路的尽头 ‎ ‎48. on the edge of-- 在---的边缘 ‎ ‎49. an empty box 一个空盒子 ‎50. be full 饱了；满的 be full of books 装满了书 ‎51. look around 四处张望/看 look around for me ‎ ‎52. don’t care 不介意 care about 在意/在乎---- care for sb 关心/照顾某人 ‎53. rhyme with--- 与---押韵 ‎ ‎54. bring sb sth bring sth to sb 拿来某物给某人 ‎ ‎55. watch the fish swim around 看鱼儿游来游去 ‎56. hold it in my hand 把它捧在手里 ‎57. play with sb/ sth 和某人/某物玩 ‎58. teach sb to do sth 教某人做某事 ‎ teach sb how to do sth 教某人怎样做某事 ‎59. take sb out for a walk 带某人出去散步 ‎60. repeat the teacher’s words 重复老师的话 ‎ ‎61.the owner of --- --- 的主人 ‎ ‎62.listen to a talk on the pet 听一个关于宠物的报告 ‎ ‎63. look a little different from other goldfish 看上去与别的金鱼有点不同 ‎64.move slowly 缓慢的移动 ‎ ‎65. have trouble with sth ---- 有困难have trouble doing sth 做某事有困难 ‎66. go camping 去野营 ‎67. fight with sb 与---打仗（架）‎ ‎68. catch the early bus 赶上早班车 catch up with sb赶上某人 catch a cold 得感冒 ‎69. live in a tank /cage 生活在鱼缸/笼子里 ‎ ‎70. like sleeping in a basket 喜欢睡在篮子里 ‎71. give the goldfish some more food 再给金鱼一些食物 ‎ ‎72. the speaker’s own pet 讲话者自己的宠物 ‎ ‎73. the right way to look after birds 照看鸟的正确方法 三.句型. ‎ ‎1.It’s very important not to take the goldfish out of the water 不把金鱼拿出水很重要 ‎2. Put your goldfish in the sun 把你的金鱼放到阳光下 ‎3. Make sure the water is not too cold or too hot.确保水不太冷也不太热 ‎4.Fantail goldfish are easy to look after. 扇尾金鱼很容易照料 ‎5.What is your favorite pet? 你最喜爱的宠物是什么？‎ ‎6.You should take her out to the park at least once a day.你应该至少一天一次带她去公园散步 ‎7. Don’t frighten the cat. 别吓唬那只猫。‎ ‎8. You mustn’t feed your pet too much food.你不应该喂你的宠物太多食物。‎ ‎9.My father is busy at work all day. 我父亲整天忙于工作。‎ ‎10. It looks a little different from other goldfish. 它看上去与其他的金鱼有点不同。 ‎ ‎8A Unit 1 知识梳理 一．重点单词：‎ A四会单词：‎ ‎1. more adj. 更多 2. nothing pron. 没什么东西（事情）‎ ‎3. bowl n. 碗 4. honest adj. 诚实的 ‎5. secret n.. 秘密，秘密的 6. joy n.. 欢乐,高兴,乐趣 ‎7. special adj. 特别的，特殊的 8.sad adj. 难过的，另人难过的 ‎9.believe vt. 相信 10.magazine n.. 杂志 ‎11.good-looking adj. 好看的，漂亮的 11.slim adj. 苗条的 ‎12.willingready adj. 乐意的，愿意的 13.singer n. 歌手 ‎14.almost adv. 几乎，差不多 15.eyesight n. 视力 ‎16.round adj. 圆形的 17.smart adj. 聪明的 ‎ ‎18.bored adj. 无聊的 19.joke n. 玩笑 ‎20.fit vi. 可容纳，装进 21.off prep 离开，脱离 ‎ ‎22.advertisement n. 广告 adv. 下班，休息 ‎23.everyone pron. 每个人 24.true adj. 忠实的；真的；真实的 ‎25.thin adj. 瘦的；薄的 26.square adj. 正方形的；平方的 ‎ ‎27.handsome adj. 英俊的 n. 正方形；广场 ‎28.cheerful adj. 令人快乐的；快乐的 29.printer n. 打印机 ‎30.height n. 高；高度 31. competition n. 竞赛，比赛；竞争 ‎32.test n;vt. .测试，考查 33.camping n. 露营；野营 ‎34.outdoor adj. 户外的，露天的 35.activity n. 活动 ‎36.solve vt. 解答；解决 37.social adj. 社会的 ‎38.future adj. 将来的,未来的 39.become vt. 成为; vi 变得 n. 将来，未来 40.famous adj. 著名的 ‎41.agree vi. 同意，赞同 42.runner n. 奔跑的人 ‎43.reader n. 读者 43.nervous adj. 紧张不安的 ‎44.uncomfortable adj. 不舒服的 45.miss vt.. 想念 ‎46.advice n. 建议；忠告 47.smiling adj. 微笑的，带着笑容的 ‎48.dark adj. 深色的 49.general adj. 大体的，笼统的，总的 ‎50.fat adj. 肥胖的 51.pleasant adj. 另人愉快的；舒适的 ‎52.wear vt. 面露，面带 53.climbing n. 攀登，攀爬 ‎54.exciting adj. 另人兴奋的，使人激动的 55.correctly adv. 正确的 B．词形转换：‎ ‎1.honest (an…) 2.special（adj.）---specially (adv) ‎ ‎3.joy (n.)---joyful (adj.) 4. sad (adj.) --- sadness (n.) ‎ ‎5.Teenager (n.)---teenage(adj.) 6..music (n.) ---musical (adj.) ‎ ‎7.slim ---(slimmer) 8.humour (n.)---humorous (adj.) ‎ ‎9.advertise (v.)--- advertisement (n.) 10.true(adj.)---- truly(adv.) truth(n.) ‎ ‎11.thin---thinner 12.cheer(v.)--- cheerful (adj.) ‎ ‎13.print(v.)---printer (n.) 14.goodwell---better best ‎ ‎15.high(n.)---height(n.) 16.advice(n.)---advise(v.) ‎ ‎17.pleasant (pleased) adj. 17.exciting(excited) adj.‎ 二．重点短语：‎ ‎1.something to drink 一些喝的东西 ‎ ‎2.some more food 再来一些食物 ‎3.nothing else没什么其他的东西 ‎ ‎4.talk towith sb about sth和某人谈论某事 ‎5.a Grade 8 student 八年级的学生 ‎ ‎6. keep secrets保守秘密 ‎7.make me happy使我快乐 ‎ ‎8. share my joy分享我的快乐 ‎ ‎9.share sth with sb和某人分享某物 ‎ ‎10.one of my best friend 我最好的一个朋友 ‎11.be willing ready to do愿意干某事 ‎ ‎12. think of想起 ‎ ‎13.give one’s seat to sb 让位给某人 ‎ ‎14.help sb. with sth. 帮助某人干某事 ‎15.someone in need 处于需要的某个人 ‎ ‎16.travel around the world 环游世界 ‎ ‎17.grow up 长大 ‎ ‎18. poor eyesight 视力很差 ‎ ‎19.because of 因为 ‎ ‎20.make him look smart使他看上去很聪明 ‎ ‎21.a good sense of humor幽默感 ‎ ‎22. make sb. laugh使某人笑 ‎ ‎23.say a bad word about sb说关于某人的坏话 ‎ ‎24.wear glasses带眼镜 ‎ ‎25.a friend named…有一个叫…的朋友 ‎ ‎26.be generous to sb 对某人慷慨 ‎27.shoulder-length hair 齐肩长发 ‎ ‎28. tell jokes 说笑话 ‎ ‎29.vote for 投票给。。。 ‎ ‎30. good-looking 好看的 ‎31.square face 方脸 ‎ ‎32. walk past 经过 ‎ ‎33.knock over our books碰撞掉我们的书 ‎ ‎34.knock our books off the desks把书从课桌上撞掉 ‎35.listen to one’s problems倾听某人的问题 ‎ ‎36.solve problems解决某人的问题 ‎ ‎37.make friends with 与某人交朋友 ‎ ‎38. tell sb about sth告诉某人某事 ‎39.try one’s best to do sth.尽力去做某事 ‎ ‎40. a true friend 一个真正的朋友 ‎ ‎41.next to 在。。。的隔壁 ‎ ‎42. have problems with在某方面有问题 ‎ ‎43.move to搬到。。。 ‎ ‎44.fell really uncomfortable 感觉真的不舒服 ‎45.during lunchtime 在午餐间 ‎ ‎46. sit alone一个人坐 ‎ ‎47.give sb. some advice (on) 在某方面给某人建议 ‎ ‎48.both…and…既。。。又 ‎49.in the future在将来 ‎ ‎50. look sporty看上去很运动 ‎ ‎51.smiling eyes 微笑的眼睛 ‎ ‎52.wear a smile on one’s face某人脸上面带笑容 ‎53.dark brown深褐色 ‎ ‎54.live next door 住在隔壁 ‎55.get to know sb.开始认识某人 ‎ ‎56.believe what he says 相信他说的话 三．重点语句：‎ ‎1.Can I have something to drink?我可以要一些喝的东西吗？‎ 当我们表达一种请求、建议或希望得到对方肯定回答时，一般疑问句可用some.、something. ‎ 例：Do you want some more food? Would you like something else? ‎ ‎2.however, he has poor eyesight because of working on the computer too much at night. ‎ 然而，他的视力很差，因为他晚上用了太长时间的电脑。‎ ‎（1）eyesight是不可数名词。‎ ‎（2）because of后接名词，代词或 v.ing形式，because后接原因状语从句。‎ 例：He didn’t catch the train because of getting up too late.‎ He didn’t catch the train because he got up too late.‎ ‎（3）Too much与 用法相同，用于修饰不可数名词，或用在动词后面做宾语，替代不可数名词，表示“太多”； much too表示“太”与too用法相近，后接形容词或副词原级。too many用于修饰可数名词，表示“太多”.‎ ‎3.She is slimmer than I am..‎ ‎(1)两者或两部分进行比较用”形容词或副词的比较级+than”表示。三者或三者以上进行比较用最高级，用of 或in来加比较范围 例：My book is more interesting than yours. ‎ 形容词的比较级的构成 A单音节词末尾加er或est ‎ B以e结尾的双音节词，只加r或st。nice—nicer ‎ C以辅音加y结尾的双音节词，把y改为i，再加er或est 例heavy—heavierheaviest healthy—healthierhealthiest D闭音节单音节词如末尾只有一个辅音字母，须双写这个辅音字母，再加er或est 例slim big fat red thin hot sad等词都须双写最后一个字母再加er或est E其他双音节词和多音节词在前面加上more或most F不规则变化的有 goodwell ----better-----best badbadlyill-----worse-----worst -‎ many much -----more----most little-----less----least ‎ farther---farthest 表距离 far ‎ ‎ further---furthest 表程度 ‎(2)表示两者“相等”用as+形容词或副词原级+as+比较对象。例：My book is as interesting as yours. ‎ ‎(3) 表示“不如” 用not soas+形容词或副词原级+as+比较对象,或“less +形容词或副词原级+than+比较对象。例：Your book is not soas interesting as mine.= Your book is less interesting than mine.‎ ‎4．What about playing football? 踢足球怎么样？‎ 表示建议的：What about=how about +名词代词宾格动名词 Why not=why don’tdoesn’tdidn’t+ 主语 +动词原形 Let’s… shall we…+动词原形 ‎5.I never feel bored or unhappy when he is with me.当他和我在一起时，我从未感到乏味或不高兴。‎ bored是形容词，指人所处的状态，意为“感到厌倦的”。‎ boring也是形容词，指令人厌倦的人或事，意为“令人觉得单调乏味”‎ 例句： The film is so boring that I feel bored very much.‎ 四．话题作文：‎ 本单元要学会用一些形容词来描述人的特征。‎ 例文：根据下面所给出的王强的个人档案,以"My Good Friend"为题,写一篇短文,介绍他的基本情况。 ‎ 要求: ‎ ‎1. 条理清楚,意思连贯,语句通顺,标点正确,书写清晰、规范。 ‎ ‎2. 要将下表的内容基本体现在文章中。 ‎ ‎3. 词数: 60-80。 ‎ 姓名:王强   性别:男 ‎ 年龄:13   脸型:圆 ‎ 眼睛:小但明亮   头发:黑且短 ‎ 外貌:英俊、有吸引力   ‎ 国籍:中国 ‎ 学校:第10中学   ‎ 特长:数学和物理 ‎ 爱好:打篮球、玩电脑游戏 ‎ 性格:诚实、友好、乐于助人 ‎ My Good Friend ‎ I have a good friend. He is a Chinese boy of 13. His name is Wang Qiang. His face is round and his eyes are small but bright. He has short and black hair. He is handsome and attractive. He studies at No.10 Middle School. He is good at Maths and physics. He likes playing basketball very much. He likes watching TV and playing computer games, too. He is very honest and friendly. He is always ready to help others. What a good friend! ‎ ‎8A Unit 2 知识梳理 一、重点单词：‎ A四会单词：‎ ‎1.British daj. 英国的 2. lift n. 电梯 ‎3.post n. 邮件 4.eraser n. 橡皮 ‎5.fall n. 秋天 6. vacation n. 假日，假期 ‎7. math n. 数学 8. movie n. 电影 ‎9. mixed adj. 男女混合；混合的 10.subject n. 科目 ‎11.sew vi. 逢，做针线活 12.myself pron. 我自己 ‎13.tasty adj. 味道好的 14.even adv. 甚至 ‎ ‎15.guys n. 朋友们，各位 16. practice vi. & vt. 练习，操练 ‎ ‎17.hero n. 被崇拜的对象；英雄 18. close adj. 密切的，亲密的 ‎19. taste n. 味道vi. & vt. 尝（起来） 品尝 20. article n. 文章 ‎21. art n.美术；艺术 22. geography n. 地理；地理学 ‎23. language n. 语言 24.PE 体育（课） ‎ ‎25.science n. 科学 26. useful adj. 有用的；有益的 ‎27. unimportant adj. 不重要的 28. useless adj. 无用的 ‎29. unpopular adj. 不受欢迎的；不流行的 30.point n. 分数 ‎31. least adj. 最少的 32. health n. 健康 ‎33. able adj. 能够……的 34. tonight adv. 今晚 ‎35.monkey n. 猴子 36. finish vi. 结束，停止 vt.结束，完成 ‎37.table tennis 乒乓球 38. chess n. 国际象棋 B词形变换 British(adj)—Britain(n) mix(v)—mixed(adj) ‎ taste(v)—tasty(adj) hero—heroes ‎ useful—useless popular—unpopular ‎ heath(n)—healthy(adj) long(adj)—length(n)‎ science-scientist ‎ 二、重点词组 ‎1. What’s …like?……怎么样？ ‎ ‎2. be like watching TV就象看电视 ‎ ‎3. ideal school life理想的学校生活 ‎ ‎4. fewer advertisements更少的广告 ‎ ‎5. life in a British school英式学校的生活 ‎ ‎6. in Year 8 /in 8 th grade在八年级 ‎ ‎7. a mixed school一所男女混合学校 ‎ ‎8. have lessons together一起上课 ‎ ‎9. my favourite subject我最喜爱的科目 ‎ ‎10. how to cook and sew如何做饭和缝纫 ‎ ‎11. cook healthy and tasty meals做健康美味的饭菜 ‎ ‎12. a reading week阅读周 ‎ ‎13. last year去年 ‎ ‎14. bring in books and magazines from home把家里的书和杂志带来 ‎ ‎15. near the end of each class临近每节课结束时 ‎ ‎16. at the end of在……尽头 ‎ ‎17. have driving lessons上驾驶课程 ‎ ‎18. drive me to school开车送我上学 ‎ ‎19. take school bus搭乘校车 ‎ ‎20. twice a week一周两次 ‎ ‎21. play softball打垒球 ‎ ‎21. at a buddy club在好友俱乐部 ‎22.练习做某事 practice doing Sth. ‎ ‎23.每个周一 every Monday ‎24.非常喜欢 enjoy … a lot ‎ ‎25.全面了解我的新学校 learn all about my new school ‎26.开心的互相交谈 have a great time talking to each other ‎27.单词的含义 the meaning of the words ‎ ‎28.密友 a close friend ‎29.有很好的口味 with a pleasant taste ‎ ‎30.在回家的路上 on the way home ‎31.在午饭时间 at lunchtime ‎ ‎32.告诉我更多关于她的情况tell me more about her ‎ ‎33.读一篇由来自美国女孩写的文章read an article by a girl from the USA ‎34.非常崇拜的某个人 someone you admire very much ‎35.不准上课讲话 mustn’t talk in class ‎ ‎36.在16岁时 at the age of 16‎ ‎37.回复 write...back ‎ ‎38…的数目the number of…‎ ‎39.暑假的长度 length of summer holiday ‎ ‎40穿校服 wear uniforms ‎41.和……一样 the same asbe alike ‎ ‎42.和……不同 be different from ‎43.电脑课computer studies ‎ ‎44.得分最少score the fewest points ‎ ‎45.拥有的钱最少have the least money ‎ ‎46.多休假几周have more weeks off ‎ ‎47.在夏季in the summertime ‎ ‎48.在线聊天 chat online ‎49.花更少的时间做家庭作业spend less time doing homework ‎ ‎50.多远how far ‎ ‎51.如果下雨下雪呢？What if it rains or snows?‎ ‎52.经常下雪 snow very often ‎ ‎53.介意做某事 mind Sb./one’s doing Sth.‎ ‎54.待在医院一个月 stay in hospital for a month ‎ ‎55.能够 be able to ‎ ‎56.向窗外看 look out of the window ‎ ‎57.上电视 be on TV ‎58.搬家去某地 move to someplace ‎ ‎59.课后活动after-school activities ‎ ‎60.有一小时时间吃午饭have an hour for lunch ‎ ‎61.戴领带wear ties ‎ ‎62.一个有许多有用书籍的大图书馆a big library with lots of useful books ‎ ‎63.与……一样大小 the same size as… ‎ ‎64.在周末at weekends ‎ ‎65.有半小时的家庭作业have half an hour of homework ‎ ‎66.举行一次去博物馆的学校郊游go on a school trip to a museum ‎ 三、重点语句：‎ ‎1.Daniel has fewer CDs than Kitty.‎ 比较两件或两件以上事物的多少可用以下的词：‎ 多： many (可数) ---more---most much (不可数) ---more---most 少： few (可数) ---fewer---fewest ‎ little (不可数)---less---least 例：Nancy has more less free time than John.‎ I join more fewer clubs than Tom.‎ She has the mostleast money.‎ ‎2.John’s school shirt and Daniel’s school shirt are alike.‎ 比较两事物的像可用be likebe alikebe the same…as 例如上句还可等于 John’s school is like Daniel’s school.‎ John’s school is the same as Daniel’s school.‎ John’s school shirt and Daniel’s school shirt are the same.‎ Amy’s pen is the same colour as Kitty’s pen.‎ 比较两事物的不同可用be different from Life in the south is quite different from that in the north.‎ ‎3.what’s…..like? 意为…怎么样？‎ What’s the weather like in NanJing?南京的天气怎么样？‎ What’s the girl like?那个女孩长什么样？（或：那个女孩是怎么样的人？）‎ 但注意区别：What does the girl like? 那个女孩喜欢什么?‎ ‎4.形容词的反义词构成：‎ ‎（1）把ful变成less如：useful---------useless careful--------careless ‎（2）加前缀un 如：‎ Important----unimportant ‎ popular-------unpopular healthy-------unhealthy pleasant-----unpleasant comfortable----uncomfortable grateful----------ungrateful helpful-----------unhelpful kind--------------unkind happy-----------unhappy ‎（3）还有些不加前缀也不加后缀easy-------difficult ‎ boring--- -interesting ‎5.we want to read all our classmates’ books as well.我们也想读所有同学的书。‎ ‎(1)as well 表示“也”一般用于肯定句和疑问句，一般放在句子末尾。‎ too一般用于肯定句和疑问句 either用于否定句，一般放在句子末尾 ‎ 而also一般放在句子中间.‎ ‎(2)as well as表示既。。。又 不但。。。而且。。。‎ 例he speaks English as well as French.他不但会说法语而且会说英语。‎ ‎ He as well as I is on duty.不仅是我，他也在值班。（注意本句谓语动词）‎ ‎6.we always have a great time talking to each other.我们总是很愉快的互相交谈。‎ ‎(1) have a greatgoodwonderful time doing sth 例：I think you must have a good time flying the kite in the park yesterday.‎ ‎(2) each与every都与单数名词连用，且意义相近但也有一定区别：‎ a. each强调个体，every强调整体。‎ Every student in our school works hard. (强调整体)‎ Each student may have one book.. (强调个体)‎ b. every 指三者或三者以上的人或物each指两个或两个以上的人或物 例：___of the two has a nice card. (each)‎ c. every只作形容词，不可单独使用。each可作代词或形容词,可单独使用。‎ e. every有反复重复的意思，如every two weeks.‎ f. every 与not连用表示部分否定，而each与not连用表示全部否定.‎ Every man is not honest.并非每个人都诚实。‎ Each man is not honest. 每个人都不诚实。‎ 四．话题作文。‎ 本单元以学校生活为主要话题，参考课本p24和p36 内容，联系实际谈谈我们的学校生活或理想中的学校生活。‎ 范文：‎ My ideal school My ideal school stars at 8 a.m. and finishes at 3 p.m.‎ I love sports and computers, so we have PE and computer studies every day. The classes are quite small. There are 20 students in each class.‎ There is a big dining hall where we can eat and chat with our friends. there is a park on one side of our school and a shopping mall on the other. We have a big library. We also have a tennis court and a swimming pool.‎ ‎ There are lots of clubs and after-school activities .Every month, we go on a school trip to a museum or a theatre.‎ ‎ ‎ ‎8A Unit3 知识梳理 一、重点单词 ‎1.ourselves (我们自己) yourself (你自己) yourselves(你们自己) themselves (他们自己)‎ herself (她自己) himself (他自己) myself (我自己) itself (它自己 )‎ ‎2. begin → beginning (开始) 3. interest→interesting (兴趣；有趣的) ‎ ‎4.real →really (真的；真实地) 5.beauty(美丽；美人) →beautiful (美丽的) ‎ ‎6.possible(可能的)→possibly 7.wonder(想知道；奇迹)→wonderful(极好的；美妙的)‎ ‎8.climber(登山者) →climb (攀登) 9.final(最后的) → finally(最后)‎ ‎10.luck(幸运) →lucky(走运的) →luckily(幸运地)‎ ‎11.support(支持) →supporter(支持者) 12.win（赢；获胜）→winner（获胜者）‎ ‎13.bad(糟糕的；坏的) →badly（拙劣的） 14.slow（慢的）→slowly（缓慢地）‎ ‎15.sunset（日落）→sunrise（日出）‎ 二、重点短语 爬山 climb the hill ‎ 需要锻炼 need to exercise ‎ 保持健康 keep fit/healthy ‎ 玩得开心 enjoy oneself/ have fun/ have a good time ‎ 乘船旅行 take a boat trip ‎ 从 --- 旁经过 go/walk past ‎ 保重 take care ‎ 在塞那河畔 by the River Seine ‎ 在 --- 的顶部 on the top of ‎ 美国总统 the president of the USA ‎ 邀请我加入阅读俱乐部 invite me to join the reading club ‎ 在 --- 开始的时候 at the beginning of ‎ 在学校门口 at the school gate ‎ 上车 get on ( a bus) ‎ 在下半场 in the second half 下车 get off ( a bus) ‎ 到达 arrive at/in get to reach ‎ 由 --- 制成 be made of ‎ 不再 not--- any more/ no more ‎ 感到开心 feel happy ‎ 名胜 places of interes ‎ 歌舞游行 the song and dance parade ‎ 自学做网页 teach oneself to make a home page ‎ 看一看 --- take a look at--- ‎ 枫叶 maple leaves ‎ 遥远的 far away ‎ 骑马 go horse riding/ ride a horse ‎ 决定做某事 decide to do sth ‎ 看日落 watch the sunset ‎ 开始玩捉迷藏 begin to play hide-and-seek ‎ 在决赛中 in the final ‎ 发生 , 进行 take place ‎ 旅行的费用 the cost of the trip ‎ 每人 per person ‎ 尽可能快的 as soon as possible ‎ 三、重点语句 ‎1. Yesterday, I took a boat trip under the famous Harbour and went past the Opera House.(page39)‎ 昨天我坐船游览了著名的港湾大桥，途中经过了歌剧院。‎ ‎①go past表示“经过”past是介词，常有go, walk, drive, run等动词连用，如:He just walked past me a few minutes ago.‎ 几分钟前他刚从我身边走过。‎ He ran past the finishing line first.‎ 他第一个越过了终点线。‎ ‎2.It was a great day but we did not enjoy it at the beginning. (Page40)‎ 那天很愉快，但是开始时，我们有点不舒服。‎ ‎①at the beginning表示“开始，起初”，强调开始的时间和地点。‎ 常用的短语结构还有at the beginning of something.如:‎ We are going to Japan at the beginning of July.‎ 我们准备七月初去日本。‎ ① 另外,in the beginning也表示“开始，起初”，它相当于at first与later, finally等词相对应。如:‎ In the beginning, there was a lot of traffic on the city roads, but finally it got better when we were on the highway.‎ 开始时，路上的交通很拥挤，但最后到了高速公路上时就好多了。3.it is made of metal and really tall.(Page41)‎ 它是由金属制成的，而且真的非常高。‎ ① be made of 表示“由……制成”，强调从制成的成品上还能看得出原材料。如： The desk is made of wood 这张桌子是木制的。‎ ② 如果从成品上已经看不出原材料，则用be made from.如：‎ Wine is made from grapes.‎ 葡萄酒是由葡萄酿成的。‎ ③ 另一个词组be made in则表示“在……地方制造”。如：‎ ‎ The toys are made in Shanghai.‎ 这些玩具是在上海生产的。‎ ④ 还有一个词组be made by表示“由某人（公司）生产” 如：The watch is made by Mr Brown 手表是由布朗先生制造的。‎ ‎4. There are models of ever a hundred places of interest from all over the world. (Page41)‎ 这里有一百多个世界各地景点的模型。‎ Place of interest表示“景点”，这里的 interest解释为“令人感兴趣的（事或人）” interest还可解释为“兴趣”，常用的短语有 show/have interest in (doing) something,表示“对……（做）某事感兴趣”。如：‎ Daniel shows great interest in computer.‎ 丹尼尔对电脑很感兴趣。‎ ① interest的形容词形式。interesting表示“有趣的”。如：‎ The trip to the world parks is very interesting.‎ 去世界公园的旅行很有趣。‎ ‎5. They kept their secrets to themselves.(Page49)‎ 他们保守着这个秘密。‎ ① Keep something to oneself表示“不将某事说出去”，如:‎ She always keeps her ideas to herself.‎ 她总是不把自己的想法告诉别人。‎ ① 另外,keep secrets for sb表示“某人保守秘密”。如：‎ Thank you so much for keeping the secret for me.‎ 非常感谢你帮我保守那个秘密。‎ ‎6.使用“and”/“but”/“or”‎ 我们使用“and, but ,or”把想法连接在一起。‎ 用“and”将相似的想法连接在一起，用“but”将不同的想法连接，用“or”连接选择性想法。‎ ‎（当两个主语相同时，我们就不用重复第一个）‎ We saw the model Eiffel Tower. We liked it very much.‎ We saw the model Eiffel Tower and liked it very much.‎ The model pyramids were small. The pyramids looked like the real ones.‎ The model pyramids were small but looked like the real ones.‎ We can visit the World Park or travel around the world.‎ 当谓语相同时，后面一个谓语可省略。‎ The model Golden Gate Bridge was huge. The model Golden Gate Bridge was wonderful.‎ The model Golden Gate Bridge was huge and wonderful.‎ The model Golden Gate Bridge was small. The model Golden Gate Bridge was wonderful.‎ The model Golden Gate Bridge was small but wonderful.‎ We can go there by coach. We can go there by underground ‎ We can go there by coach or by underground.‎ Grammar 使用动词+动词不定式。‎ 通常这些单词与动词不定式连用agree choose decide hope learn plan prepare want等。‎ 句型与例句 ‎1.what / how about…？……怎么样?‎ It’s too hot. What about going swimming?‎ ‎2.be willing / ready to do sth.愿意做某事 I’m willing /ready to help you with your English.‎ ‎3.Share sth with sb和某人分享某物 He shares one room with her brother ‎4.have some problems/difficulty with…在……上有困难 Do you have any problems with your friends?‎ ‎5.vote for/ against sb赞同/反对某人 Who are you going to vote for？‎ ‎6.make sb do sth让某人做某事 The teacher made him go home after school.‎ ‎7.drive sb to…开车送某人去……‎ Place drive my grandfather to the bus station.‎ ‎8.have a great /good /nice/wonderful time doing sth做某事很高兴 She had a wonderful time dancing at the party ‎9. have (not/no)…time for (doing) sth.(没)有时间做某事 My English teacher has no time for watching TV.‎ ‎10.…on one side,…on the other side.……在一边，……在另一边 There’s a garden on one side, and a cinema on the other side.‎ ‎11.invite sb to do sth.邀请某人做某事 ‎ I’ll invite him to join me in a walk.‎ ‎12.teach oneself …自学……‎ I taught myself Japanese at home last year.‎ ‎13.Thank you for doing sth因做某事而感激某人 Thank you for helping me with the housework.‎ 四、话题作文 你的网络朋友即将来拜访你，你为了迎接她，想把她带出去玩一天，地点在南山。你正在为了这一天的行程做计划，并且写一封邀请信给你的同学。‎ 要求; 1写出地点，时间（南山 South Hill Sunday）‎ ‎ 2准备要进行的一些活动。如: 唱歌、野炊、捉迷藏 ‎ 3.最后要拍照留念。‎ 注意要点明在何时何地见面，如何前往南山，简要的概括一下。‎ ‎8A Unit4 知识梳理 一、重点单词 ‎1.leaf—leaves{树叶} 2. follow—following{以下的}‎ ‎3.protection—protect{保护} 4. encourage—encouragement{鼓励}‎ ‎5.write—writer{作者} 6. wolf—wolves{狼} ‎ ‎7.till—until{直到…为止} 8.hunt—hunter{猎人}‎ ‎9.lose—loss{丧失} 10.peace—peaceful{和平的}‎ ‎11.mouse—mice{老鼠} 12.land—farmland{农田}‎ ‎13.farm—farmer{农民} 14.act—action{行动}‎ ‎15.sad—sadly{可惜，令人伤心的} 16.training—train{训练}‎ 应注意的词：delicious{美味的} thirsty{口渴的}‎ ‎ continue{继续} thick{厚的} medicine{药} ‎ 二、重点短语 ‎1.weigh only 100 grams只重 100 克 ‎ ‎2.survive in the wild在野外生存 ‎ ‎3.grow into a healthy giant panda长成一只健康的熊猫 ‎ ‎4.in the future在将来 ‎ ‎5.kill wild animals for their fur杀野生动物为了它们的皮毛 ‎ ‎6.have nowhere to live没地方可住 ‎ ‎7.be in danger在危险之中 ‎ ‎8.take them away把它们带走 ‎ ‎9.take the following actions采取以下行动 ‎ ‎10.build more reserves建造更多的自然保护区 ‎ ‎11.cut down trees and forests砍伐树和森林 ‎ ‎12.not … any more不再 ……‎ ‎13.protect wild animals保护野生动物 ‎ ‎14.see the feeding of animals看到动物的喂养 ‎ ‎15.attack people袭击人 ‎ ‎16.arrive at /in get to reach到达 ‎ ‎17.go hunting去打猎 ‎ ‎18.look delicious看起来美味 ‎ ‎19.take care of照顾 ‎ ‎20.know more about sth.更多的了解某物 ‎ ‎21.ask sb to do sth请某人做某事 ‎ ‎22.the Wild Animals Club野生动物俱乐部 ‎ ‎23.write a report about sth写一个关于某物的报告 ‎ ‎24.like least最不喜欢 ‎ ‎25.look like…看起来像 …… ‎ ‎26.only 10 months old只有十个月大 ‎ ‎27.at 4 months在四个月的时候 ‎ ‎28.start to study开始上学 ‎ ‎29.at the beginning在一开始时 ‎ ‎30.up to 14 hours a day长达一天 14 小时 ‎ ‎31.leave sth保留某物 ‎ ‎32.by oneself独自 ‎ ‎33.catch a giant panda捕获一头大熊猫 ‎ ‎34.be good at/do well in擅长于做某事 ‎ ‎35.make medicine制药 ‎ ‎36.the loss of…… 的损失 ‎ ‎37.live as a family像一家人一样生活 ‎ ‎38.be friendly to/towards each other彼此之间很友好 ‎ ‎39.spend some time doing sth花一些时间做某时 ‎ ‎40.get smaller and smaller变得越来越小 ‎ ‎41.become farmlands变成可耕地 ‎ ‎42.就某事给报刊杂志写信 write to newspaper and magazines about sth 三、重点语句 ‎1.At the very beginning, Xiwang drank her mother’s milk for up to 14 hours a day.(page60,lines11——12) 一开始，“希望”每天长达14小时都在喝母亲的奶。 up to 表示“达到，高达，多达”。如：The reading room can hold up to 150 people at the same time.这间阅览室可容纳150人之多。 2. Mothers often leave baby for two whole days on their own.(page60,line20). 大熊猫妈妈们自己的孩子单独待两整天。 on one's own 表示“独立地，独自地”，与by oneself或alone意思相近。如：Many young people in the USA like living on their own.美国很多年轻人喜欢独自居住。Kitty made the poster by herself. 基蒂自己制作了这份海报。Zhanghua was at home alone when the fire at his neighbour's home began.邻居家起火时，张华独自一人呆在家里。 3. If I see a snake in front of me, I will run the other way. (page64,partA1).如果看到前面有条蛇，我会跑开。 the other way.表示“另一个方向”。此外，由way构成的短语还有：on one's way to......在某人去（某地）的路上 by the way 顺便说一句. lose one's way 迷路. in many ways用多种方法. 4. If farmer keep taking the land, giant pandas will have nowhere to live . (page70,partA) 如果农民继续强占土地的话，大熊猫就会没有地方可住了。 keep doing sth .表示“不停地做某事，反复的做某事”，强调某个动作多次反复的发生或进行。如：It kept raining for a week.雨一直下了一个星期。 5. If people find baby pandas alone, they will often take them away. (page60 , line21). 如果人们发现熊猫宝宝独自呆着，他们常常会把它们带走。 find + somebody/something + adj.表示“发现某人/某物…”。这是“动词+宾语+宾语补足语”的结构，宾语后面的形容词是宾语补足语，起补充说明宾语的作用。如：She found the dog dead at the door.她发现狗死在门边。 Grammar 1.①用条件状语从句谈论可能发生的情况，即用条件状语从句谈论有关一个可能动作可能产生的结果。    ②例句：If hunters catch a giant panda , they will kill it for.    ③为if引导的条件状语从句加一般将来时的句子。 2.①我们也用because of' 来作为某事的理由。我们在用because of后面加一个名词,名词短语或代词。    ②例句：It is very difficult for giant pandas to survive in the wild because of people 四、话题作文 你想参加你们学校的野生动物俱乐部，为俱乐部写一份有关濒危动物的报告，让大家都了解现在动物的处境，并采取适当的行动。‎ 提示：1.描述出你所写动物的外貌，习性。‎ ‎2.写出它们现存的数量以及逐渐消亡的原因。‎ ‎3.总结出我们所要采取的行动与落实的目的。‎ 例如：大熊猫 ‎1.人们都喜欢大熊猫；大熊猫平静而安详，吃竹子；‎ ‎2.世界上仅存有大约一千只大熊猫，数目越来越少；‎ ‎3.大熊猫生活的地方正在变为农田，人们正在取其毛皮猎捕它们；如此下去，世界上很快 将再无大熊猫。‎ ‎8A Unit 5 知识梳理 一. 重点单词 ‎1. birdwatcher名,研究野鸟的人(birdwatch动,birdwatching名) ‎ ‎2. forked形, 叉状的(fork名) ‎ ‎3. northern形,北方的(north名) ‎ ‎4.golden形,金色的(gold名) ‎ ‎5. brownish形,带棕色的(brown形.名) ‎ ‎6.hooked形,钩状的(hook名) ‎ ‎7. nature名,(natural形) ‎ ‎8. comfortably副,舒适地,(comfortable形) ‎ ‎9.easily副,容易地(easy形) ‎ ‎10. tourist名,观光者(tour名) ‎ ‎11. importance 名,重要性(important形) ‎ ‎12. regular形,规则的(irregular形) ‎ ‎13. honest形,诚实的(dishonest形) ‎ ‎14. necessary形,必要的(unnecessary形) ‎ ‎15. correct 形,正确的(incorrect形) ‎ ‎16. common形,平常的(uncommon形) ‎ ‎17. possible形,可能的(impossible形) ‎ ‎18. friendly形,友好的(unfriendly形) ‎ ‎19.welcome形.动,欢迎的,欢迎( unwelcome形.动) ‎ ‎20. able形,能的(unable形) ‎ ‎21. quiet形,安静的(quietly副) ‎ ‎22. gentle形,温柔的(gently副) ‎ ‎23.angry形,生气的(angrily副) ‎ ‎24. noisy形,嘈杂的(noise名) ‎ ‎25. nice形,好的(nicely副) ‎ ‎26. soft形,软的,轻的(softly副) ‎ ‎27.frighten动,吓唬(frightened形) ‎ ‎28. include动,包括(including介) ‎ ‎29.simple形,简单的(simply副) ‎ 二. 重点短语 ‎1. go birdwatching 去观鸟 ‎ ‎2.at the market 在市场 ‎ ‎3. black feathers黑色的羽毛 ‎ ‎4. fly to northern countries飞往北方国家 ‎ ‎5. long thin neck 细长的脖子 ‎ ‎6. broad wings 宽阔的翅膀 ‎ ‎7. like the parrot best最喜欢鹦鹉 ‎ ‎8. long-pointed wings尖尖的翅膀 ‎ ‎9.colourful feathers彩色的羽毛 ‎ ‎10.a nature reserve 自然保护区 ‎ ‎11.in north- east China在中国东北 ‎ ‎12. one of the world’s most important wetlands 世界最重要的湿地之一 ‎ ‎13. provide food and shelter提供食物和住所 ‎ ‎14. all year round全年 ‎ ‎15.an important living area 一个重要的居住地 ‎ ‎16.make more space for farms为农场让地方 ‎ ‎17. be in danger危险 ‎ ‎18.protect these endangered birds 保护这些濒临灭绝的鸟 ‎ ‎19.members of our Birdwatching Club我们观鸟俱乐部的成员 ‎ ‎20. study the different kinds of birds研究不同种类的鸟 ‎ ‎21. the changes in their numbers它们在数量上的改变 ‎ ‎22. do a bird count做鸟的数量调查 ‎ ‎23.understand the importance of the wetlands理解湿地的重要性 ‎ ‎24.take action to protect wildlife 采取行动保护野生动物 ‎ ‎25. walk a long way走很长一段路 ‎ ‎26. wear new leather shoes 穿新皮鞋 ‎ ‎27. leave litter there丢垃圾在那儿 ‎ ‎28. in the future 在未来 ‎ ‎29.show good manners to others对他人有礼貌 ‎ ‎30. speak softly温柔地说 ‎ ‎31.shine brightly阳光照耀 ‎ ‎32. get on the school bus 上校公交车 ‎ ‎33. talk loudly大声说话 ‎ ‎34. greet us politely很礼貌地迎接我们 ‎ ‎35.listen carefully 仔细听 ‎ ‎36frighten the birds吓着鸟了 ‎ ‎37. drive carefully 小心驾驶 ‎ 38. arrive at Beijing Wildlife Park 到达北京野生公园 ‎ ‎39.an area of … 一个……的面积 ‎ ‎40. different kinds of birds 不同种类的鸟 ‎ ‎41. an interesting bird show 依次有趣的鸟展 42. World Wetlands Day世界湿地日 ‎ ‎43.date of birth 出生日期 ‎ 44. activities to protect wildlife 保护野生动物的活动 ‎ ‎45. join the Birdwatching Club加入观鸟俱乐部 ‎ ‎46.become a member of …成为一个……的成员 ‎ ‎47. be interested in playing volleyball对打排球感兴趣 ‎ 48. come to club activities来参加俱乐部活动 ‎ ‎49. call me on…按……号码给我打电话 ‎ ‎50.e-mail me at…按……地址给我发邮件 ‎ ‎51. application form 申请表 ‎ ‎52. Yours sincerely你忠实的(朋友)‎ 三. 重点语句及讲解 ‎1. I am going birdwatching at the market 我打算去市场上观鸟.‎ ‎ go birdwatching 意为 “去观鸟”,为固定结构,类似的还有: go shopping, go swimming, go fishing ,‎ ‎ go running , go camping , go hiking , go climbing 等 ‎2. The area provides food and shelter for wildlife .这地方为野生动物提供食物和栖息地.‎ ‎ provide sth for sb/sth=provide sb/sth with sth 表示 “为某人/某物提供某物”,如 ‎ Our school plans to help the students in poor areas by providing them with some stationery.=Our school ‎ ‎ plans to help the students in poor areas by providing some stationery for them. 我们学校准备为贫困地区的孩子们提供一些文具来帮助他们.‎ 3. Many birds live comfortably in Zhalong Nature Reserve all year round ,while some only stay there for a short time.许多鸟常年舒适地生活在扎龙自然保护区,然而有些鸟则仅在那里作短暂停留.‎ ‎ all year round 表示 “全年, 常年”, 如:‎ ‎ The weather here is very comfortable all year round .这里的天气全年都很舒适.‎ ‎ 类似的短语还有all day long (整天, 全天),如:‎ ‎ The dog kept barking all day long. 这只狗一整天都在叫个不停.‎ 4. There are many fish in the wetlands, and the birds can easily catch them for food. 实湿地有很多鱼, 鸟儿们可以很容易地捕猎到它们的食物. ‎ ‎ many fish 表示 “很多鱼”. Fish 一词表示 “鱼” 的含义时,其单复数的拼写形式是一样的.‎ ‎ 如:The old man caught only one fish today. 那个老人今天只捉到了一条鱼.‎ ‎ Mum bought two fish and some vegetables for dinner. 妈妈买了两条鱼和一些蔬菜作晚餐. ‎ ‎5. This means there will be less and less space for wildlife .这意味着供野生动物生活的空间越来越少.‎ ‎ (1) less and less表示 “越来越少”, 后接形容词或不可数名词, 如: ‎ The weather is getting less and less cold. 天气变得越来越不冷了.‎ People get less and less work to do now. 现在人们的工作量越来越少了.‎ ‎ (2) more and more表示 “越来越多”, 后接形容词或名词的可数和不可数形式,如:‎ Zhou Jielun’s songs are more and more popular among the young people. 周杰伦的歌曲在年轻人之中越来越受欢迎.‎ More and more students can play computer games. 越来越多的学生会打电子游戏.‎ More and more water is being polluted. 越来越多的水正在受到污染.‎ ‎(3) fewer and fewer 表示 “越来越少”, 后接可数名词的复数,如:‎ Factories need fewer and fewer workers this year. 今年工厂需要员工越来越少了.‎ 6. We need more people to help us count and do something to help the birds.我们需要更多的人来帮我们数鸟以及为帮助鸟做些事情. ‎ ‎ (1) need 表示 “需要”, 作行为动词时后接名词,代词,动词不定式,动词-ing 形式等,如:‎ ‎ We need two more students. 我们还需要两名同学.‎ ‎ You need to make a plan ahead. 你需要提前制订一个计划.‎ ‎ I need you to help me with my work. 我需要你来帮忙我工作.‎ ‎ These flowers need watering. 这些花需要浇水了.‎ ‎ (2) need 作情态动词时, 后接动词原形,如:‎ ‎ Need he do his homework right now? 他现在需要做作业吗?‎ ‎ You needn’t hand in your exercise books today. 今天你不必要上交作业本. ‎ 7. We hope this information will help them understand and make them actively take action to protect wildlife .‎ ‎ 我们希望这个信息会帮助他们理解并积极采取行动来保护野生动物.‎ ‎ (1) hope 表示 “希望”,可作名词和动词. 作动词时后常接不定式和句子,如:‎ ‎ He hopes to go to collage when he grows up. 他希望长大后去上大学。‎ ‎ I hope I can help the poor children by donating some money. 我希望通过捐献一些钱来帮助贫困儿童。‎ ‎ （2）make sb do 使某人干……, 如： The story makes us laugh happily. 这个故事使我们开怀大笑。被动语态时结构为 “sb be made to do……”, 如： The students are made to do lots of homework every day. ‎ ‎ 学生每天被迫做很多家课。‎ 6. More and more birds are in danger because they do not have enough living space.越来越多的鸟处于危险境地是因为他们没有足够的生存空间.‎ ‎ be in danger表示 “处于危险境地”，如：‎ ‎ Many birds are in danger now .We must take action to protect them. 许多鸟处于危险境地，我们必须采取行动去保护它们。‎ ‎9. Our planes leaves at ten o’clock tonight. 我们的飞机将在今晚10点离开.‎ ‎ 此处用一般现在时表达一般将来的意思。当谈论按日历、时间表、节目表等要发生的事情时可用一般现在时代替一般将来时， 如：‎ ‎ Tomorrow is Sunday. 明天是星期天。‎ ‎ The plane arrives at 10am tomorrow. 飞机明天上午10 点到达。‎ ‎10. We talked loudly until Mr Wu told us to be quiet.我们大声地说话直到吴老师叫我们安静.‎ ‎ until 表示 “直到”，用于肯定句时，主句动词用延续动词，如：‎ It rained heavily until 6 pm yesterday. 昨天大雨一直下到晚上6 点。‎ until 用于否定句时，主句动词常用短暂动词，如：‎ I didn’t go to bed until my father came back last night.昨晚直到我爸爸回来我才睡觉。‎ ‎11.The reserve has an area of more than 210,000 hectares.这个自然保护区面积达210,000多公顷.‎ ‎ have an area of …表示 “拥有……的面积”，如：‎ ‎ Our school has an area of 2000 hectares. 我们学校拥有2000公顷的面积。‎ ‎12. Would you like to go birdwatching with us at Beijing Wildlife Park?你想和我一起去北京野生公园观鸟吗?‎ ‎ Would like 表示 “想要”，后接名词、代词、不定式，如：‎ ‎ I would like a cup of coffee. 我想要一杯咖啡。‎ ‎ He would like to go birdwatching with us. 他想要和我们一起去观鸟。‎ ‎ Would you like to do …? 是一个征求意见的句型，肯定回答常用 “Yes, I’d like/love to.” ‎ 13. Zhalong is the home of a lot of plants and animals , including different kinds of birds.扎龙是许 ‎ 多植物,动物以及不同种类鸟儿的家. ‎ ‎ (1) the home of … 表示 “……的家”，如：‎ ‎ Nature reserves are the homes of lots of wildlife. 自然保护区是许多野生动物的家。‎ ‎ （2）including 意思是 “ 包括”，介词， 如：‎ ‎ I have been to many places of interest , including the Great Wall, the West Lake and so on.‎ ‎ 我去过很多名胜，包括长城、西湖等。 ‎ ‎14.I would like to become a member of the Birdwatching Club. 我想成为观鸟俱乐部的成员.‎ ‎ a member of 意思是 “ 一个……的成员”， 如： ‎ ‎ Jane is a member of the Swimming Club. 简是游泳俱乐部的一名成员。‎ 15. I would like to become a birdwatcher because I like birds and nature very much.我想成为一个 研究野鸟的人是因为我很喜欢鸟和大自然.‎ because /because of 意思都是 “ 因为” ， 但because 用于引导句子，而because of 接单词或短语，‎ 如： He didn’t go to school yesterday because he was ill. 他昨天因为生病没上学。 ‎ He failed his exams because of his carelessness. 他因为粗心而没通过考试。‎ 16. I will be very happy if I can become a member of your club.如果我能成为你们俱乐部的一名 ‎ 成员,我会很高兴的.if 意思是 “如果”，在引导表将来意思的句子时可用一般现在时，如：‎ If it doesn’t rain tomorrow, we will go to the park. 如果明天不下雨，我们将去公园。‎ 四. 单元话题 ‎1． 写一封信给观鸟俱乐部的主席,告诉他你的爱好以及如何帮助俱乐部.（见课本90页）；‎ ‎2．假如Millie推荐Sandy为今年最佳歌手奖的人选，请你用英语写一封推荐信给吴老师。‎ 内容要点如下：‎ ‎1)Sandy是学校音乐俱乐部的成员，擅长唱歌和跳舞。‎ ‎2)新歌学得快，歌唱得优美；每天坚持在钢琴上练唱两小时。‎ ‎3)友好和乐观，工作努力，爱动脑筋，经常组织班级活动。‎ 注意：a..信须包括内容要点，可适当增加细节；‎ ‎　　　b.词数６０个左右，信的开头和结尾已给出，不计入总词数。‎ Dear Mr Wu,‎ ‎ I would like to recommend Sandy for this year’s Best Singer Award.__________________‎ ‎___________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎___________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎___________________________________________________________________________‎ I think Sandy should get an award. I look forward to hearing from you soon. ‎ ‎ Yours faithfully,‎ Millie 范文 ‎ Dear Mr .Wu,‎ ‎ I would like to recommend Sandy for this year’s Best Singer Award. As a member of the School ‎ Music Club, Sandy is good at singing and dancing. She learns to sing new songs quickly. And she practises singing on the piano for two hours every day. She works hard to make her singing as beautiful as she can. She often organizes class activities. She is kind and cheerful. We all love her.‎ ‎ I think Sandy should get an award. I look forward to hearing from you soon.‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ Yours faithfully,‎ Millie ‎8A Unit 6 知识梳理 一. 重点单词 ‎1. natural形，自然的（nature名) 2. lightning名，闪电（light名.形) ‎ ‎3. shake动，摇动（shaking名) 4. direction名，方向（direct动，director名) ‎ ‎5.wild形，疯狂的（wildly副) 6. trap动，被陷（trapped形) ‎ ‎7. loud形，大声的（loudly副) 8. cloud名，云（cloudy形) ‎ ‎9.wind名，风（windy形) 10. fog名，雾（foggy形) ‎ ‎11. frost名，霜（frosty形) 12. discuss动，讨论（discussion名) ‎ ‎13.terrible形，可怕的（terribly副) 14. call动，打电话（caller名) ‎ ‎15. arrival名，到达（arrive动) 16. serious形，严重的（seriously副) ‎ ‎17. cause 动，引起（because连) 18. nearly副，几乎（near形，介) ‎ ‎19. warn动，警告（warning名) 20. break动，打破（broken形)‎ 一. 重点短语 1. start to rain 开始下鱼 ‎ ‎2. half an hour later 半小时以后 ‎ 3. lose the game 输了比赛 ‎ 4. ‎4. kill thousands of people导致几千人死亡 ‎ 5. a car accident一场车祸 ‎ 6. ‎6. wash the village away冲走了村庄 ‎ 7. start a big fire 引起一场大火 ‎ 8. ‎8. fall from a tree 从树上跌下来 ‎ 9. mop all the water up把所有的水拖干净 ‎ 10. ‎10. crash into a tree撞倒了树 ‎ 11. do some shopping 购物 ‎ 12. ‎12. a big noise like thunder 像雷一样的噪声 ‎ 13. look at each other in fear互相害怕的看着 ‎ 14. ‎14. under the ground在地下 ‎ 15. start to shake 开始晃动 ‎ 16. ‎16. run in all directions到处乱跑 ‎ 17. try my best to do尽我最大努力 ‎ 18. ‎18. run wildly疯狂的跑 ‎ 19. fall down跌倒,跌落 ‎ 20. ‎20. calm down平静下来 ‎ 21. ‎21. say to myself自言自语 ‎ 22. go through my mind掠过头脑 ‎ 23. ‎23. stay alive还活着 ‎ 24. a packet of chocolate 一袋巧克 ‎ 25. ‎25. hear shouts from excided people 听到人们兴奋的喊叫声 ‎ 26. in a great hurry 急忙 ‎ 27. ‎27. move away the bricks and stones 搬开砖头和石块 ‎ 28. scream for help大声呼 ‎ 29. ‎29. a slight shaking through my body一阵轻微的震动传过我的身体 ‎ 30. survive the earthquake 在地震中幸存 ‎ 31. ‎31. be trapped陷入困境 ‎ 32. drop a little下降了一点 ‎ 33. ‎33. become worse 更糟 ‎ 34. the weather today今天的天气 ‎ 35. ‎35. search the Internet上网 ‎ 36. discuss…with…和……讨论…… ‎ 37. ‎37. plan a trip to Tangshan计划去唐山旅行 ‎ 38. on the side of the road 在路的一侧 ‎ 39. ‎39. drive you to school 开车送你去学校 ‎ 40. as usual像往常一样 ‎ 41. ‎41. break down 损坏 ‎ ‎42. a terrible snowstorm一场可怕的暴风雪 ‎ ‎43. weather conditions 天气情况 ‎ ‎44. cover the whole road 覆盖了整个路 ‎ ‎45. time of arrival 到达的时间 ‎ ‎46. get worse变得更糟 ‎ ‎47. crash into 陷入,撞到 ‎ ‎48. catch fire 着火 ‎ ‎49. send the victims to…把受害人送到……‎ ‎50. share…with…和……分享/分担…… ‎ ‎51. look out of the window 向窗外看 ‎ ‎52. forget to bring my keys 忘记带我的钥匙 ‎ ‎53. continue to fall around us 继续在我们周围飘落 ‎ ‎54. come from behind 从后面来 ‎ ‎55. fall over 跌倒 ‎ ‎56. weather report 天气预报 ‎ ‎57. snowstorm warning 暴风雪警报 ‎ ‎58. the noise of traffic 交通的吵闹声 ‎ ‎59. remove the snow除去积雪 ‎ ‎60. typhoon signal number台风警告指数 ‎ ‎61. the terrible situation恶劣的情形 ‎ ‎62. social workers社会工作者 ‎ ‎63. the people in need 需要的人们 ‎ ‎64. give out food 吩咐法食物 ‎ ‎65. clean drinking water干净的饮用水 三. 重点语句及讲解 ‎1. Lighting started a big fire in a house. 闪电引起一座房屋着火.‎ ‎（1） start a fire意思是 “引起火”，词组 on fire (着火),指状态；catch fire (着火)，强调动作，如：‎ The house caught fire last night . 昨晚房屋着火了。 ‎ ‎ The shop has been on fire for two hours. 那家店铺被火烧了两小时。‎ ‎ (2) fire 一词在表示具体的火灾实例时用作可数名词；当fire 用作物质名词时为不可数名词。如：‎ ‎ There was a big fire in the forest last year. 去年森林里起了一场大火。‎ ‎ It’s so cold! Let’s start a fire in the room. 太冷了，让我们在房间里生个火吧。‎ ‎ Paper catches fire easily. 纸易着火。‎ ‎2. I was doing some shopping when it started. 地震开始时我正在买东西.‎ ‎ 过去进行时的结构为 “ were/was + V-ing”,表示过去的某时正在发生的动作。‎ ‎ 此处when 引导的从句表达了过去的一个点时。如：‎ ‎ When the teacher came in, the students were reading. 当老师进来时，同学们正在读书。‎ ‎ I was doing my homework at 7pm last night. 昨晚7点时我正在做作业。‎ ‎3. Some people screamed because they were very frightened.有些尖叫是因为他们太害怕. ‎ ‎ frightened意思是 “害怕的，恐惧的”,和afraid 意思相近，都可以组成be afraid/frightened of…,be afraid/frightened to do…,如：‎ ‎ I am afraid/frightened of dogs. 我怕狗。‎ ‎ He is afraid/frightened of going out at night. 他害怕在晚上出门。‎ ‎ They are afraid /frightened to fail the exams. 他们害怕考试失败。‎ 4. People were running wildly while pieces of glass and bricks were falling down. 人们疯狂的跑者而同时玻璃和砖头的碎片也在往下落.‎ ‎（1） while 连接两个同时发生的动作，如： ‎ ‎ He was listening to music while he was doing his homework. 他边听音乐边做作业。 ‎ ‎ She is singing while she is dancing now. 她边唱边跳。‎ ‎ （2）while 还可连接有对比意思的句子，如：‎ ‎ I like apples while my sister likes pears. 我喜欢苹果而我的妹妹却喜欢梨。‎ ‎ My father is reading newspapers while my mother is cooking. 我爸爸在看报而我妈妈在做饭。‎ 5. I thought someone could hear me but no one came for a very long time.我以为会有人听到我的声音但是好长时间都没有人来.‎ ‎ could 在这里有推测的意思，意思为 “ 可能”，还有些词可用于推测，如： must, may,‎ ‎ can, might …, 可能性最大的是must, 但用于否定推测的常用can/could. 如：‎ ‎ He must be in his office, because I saw him go in just now. ‎ 他肯定在他的办公室里，因为我刚才看到他进去的。 ‎ ‎ He can’t be a student now, because he left school two years ago. ‎ 他现在不可能是个学生，因为两年前他辍学了。 ‎ 6. I was trying to find my way out when I suddenly heard some noise above me.‎ 我正在找出路,突然我听到在我的上方有嘈杂的声音.‎ ‎ 在一个长动作发生的过程中又发生了一个短动作，这时的引导词when可以译为 “突然”。‎ ‎ 如： We students were doing our homework in the classroom when the lights went out.‎ ‎ 我们学生正在做作业时突然电灯灭了。‎ ‎ I was walking in the street when I met an old friend of mine yesterday.‎ ‎ 昨天我在大街上走时突然遇到了我的一个老朋友。‎ 7. I could not see anything at all and I did not know if anyone was around me.我什么也看不见,我也不知道我周围是否有人.‎ ‎（1） not …at all 意思是 “ 根本不……”,如；‎ ‎ He can’t dance at all. 他根本就不会跳舞。‎ ‎ We don’t know him at all. 我们根本就不认识他。‎ ‎（2）if 引导的句子充当宾语，此时没有主将从现，如：‎ ‎ I don’t know if he has known the secret. 我不知道是否他已经知道了秘密。‎ ‎ Do you know if the famous singer will come to our school next week?‎ ‎ 你知道那个明星下个星期是否会来吗？‎ ‎ (3) if 引导条件状语从句时有主将从现，如：‎ ‎ If he writes to me ,I’ll let you know. 如果他写信给我，我会让你知道的。‎ ‎ I don’t know if he will come tomorrow. If he comes, I’ll call you.‎ ‎ 我不知道明天他是否会来。如果他来，我打电话给你。‎ 8. A moment of fear went through my body but I told myself to calm down since I was still alive.我的脑中掠过一阵恐惧,但我告诉自己要镇定下来,因为我仍然还活着.‎ ‎（1） go through 意思是 “ 从……通过”，一般指从内部通过，如：‎ ‎ They were afraid of going through the forest.他们害怕从森林中通过。‎ ‎（2）tell sb to do… / tell sb not to do… 告诉某人干……/告诉某人不干……‎ My parents often tell me to study hard. 我父母经常告诉我要好好学习。 ‎ Our teachers tell us not to make a lot of noise in the classroom.‎ 我们的老师告诉我们不要在教室里吵闹。‎ ‎9. Then I heard shouts from excited people. 然后我听到了激动的人群的叫喊声.‎ ‎ excited是形容词，表示 “兴奋的， 激动的”； exciting 也是形容词， 但它表示的是 “令人兴奋的，令人激动的”， 如：‎ ‎ Children are very excited when they open their Christmas presents.‎ ‎ 当孩子们打开圣诞礼物时他们非常兴奋。‎ ‎ The end of the story about the Taiwan earthquake is really exciting.‎ ‎ 那个关于台湾地震的故事的结尾的确另人激动。‎ ‎10. They were in a great hurry to move away the bricks and stones.人们迫不及待地移开转块和石头.‎ ‎ be in a great hurry to do …表示 “急忙做某事”== do … in a great hurry ‎ He is in a great hurry to go to school every day. ‎ ‎ = He goes to school in a great hurry every day. 他每天急急忙忙地去上学。‎ ‎11. Now, I know that bad weather can be dangerous.现在,我知道坏天气可能是很危险的.‎ ‎ dangerous 是形容词，它的名词是 danger, 可组成词组in danger,如：‎ ‎ Playing in the street is very dangerous. 在马路上玩耍很危险。‎ ‎ The wounded bird is in danger. It is dying .那只受伤的鸟很危险了，它快死了。‎ ‎12. Her school caught fire because lighting hit it. 她的学校着火是因为闪电击中了它.‎ ‎ Catch fire 意思是 “着火”，侧重动作；on fire 意思是 “ 着火”，侧重状态。‎ ‎13．I am very interested in playing volleyball. 我对打排球非常感兴趣。‎ ‎ be interested in sth / doing sth 表示 “ 对……感兴趣”,如：‎ ‎ I hope all my students are interested in English.我希望我所有的学生都对英语感兴趣。‎ ‎ I hope all my students are interested in learning English.我希望我所有的学生都对学英语感兴趣。‎ ‎14．When we arrived at the bus stop ,we could see many people there .‎ ‎ 当我们到达车站时， 我们看到有很多人在那儿。‎ ‎ arrive in /at 意思为 “到达”，大地点用arrive in ，小地点用 arrive at ；get to / reach 意思也是 “到达”， 没有地点大小之分；当后面没有地点作宾语时，用arrive.如：‎ He will arrive in Beijing in two hours . 他将在两小时后到达北京。‎ The plane arrived at the airport five minutes ago. 飞机是五分钟之前到达机场的。‎ When did you get home last night? 昨晚你何时到家的？‎ When did they arrive? --- One hour ago. 他们什么时候到的？ ---一小时前。‎ ‎ ‎ 四. 话题作文 ‎1． 写一篇关于自然灾害的作文,可以写大火, 地震, 洪水,台风,暴雪等。（见课本106页）；‎ ‎2．请根据下列内容，写一篇短文，要求要点全部写出。‎ 昨夜，一场可怕的洪水袭击了我村，冲走了许多房屋。洪水到来时我和我父母仍在睡觉。‎ 我们急忙到屋外，看到四周都是水。我们将餐桌从屋内移到了屋外，但它的大小只够两个人 ‎ 坐在上面。屋前有颗大树，于是我快速爬上了那颗树并在上面待了好几个小时。‎ ‎ A flood ‎____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ 范文 ‎ A flood Last night, a terrible flood hit my village. It washed away many houses. When the flood came, my parents and I were still sleeping. We hurried out of our house and saw water all around us. We moved the table out of the house, but it was only large enough for two people to sit on. There was a big tree in front of the house. So I quickly climbed up the tree and stayed in it for several hours.‎ ‎8B Unit 1 知识梳理 一、词汇 ‎ 1.present 给，赠（动词） presentation 演出（名词） ‎ ‎ 2. sonth 南方（名词） southern南方的（形容词） ‎ ‎ 3. marry结婚（动词） married 已婚的（形容词）marriage婚姻（名词） ‎ ‎ 4.poison毒（名词） poisonous有毒的（形容词）‎ ‎ 5.pollute污染（动词） polluted被污染的（形容词） pollution污染（名词） ‎ ‎ 6.alone孤单（副词） lonely孤独的（形容词） ‎ ‎ 7.especial特别的（形容词） .especially 特别地 尤其（副词） ‎ ‎ 8.recent 最近的（形容词） .recently最近（副词）‎ ‎ 9. health健康（名词） healthy健康的（形容词） healthily健康地（副词）‎ ‎ healthier更健康的（形容词） healthiest 最健康的（形容词）‎ ‎ unhealthy 不健康的（形容词） unhealthily健康地（副词）‎ ‎ 10.luck 运气（名词） lucky 幸运的（形容词） luckily幸运地（副词） ‎ ‎ unlucky不幸运的（形容词） unluckily.不幸运地，不幸的是（副词）‎ ‎ 11.pleasant 使人愉快的（形容词） unpleasant使人不愉快的 ，讨厌的（形容词） ‎ ‎ pleasure 快乐、愉快（名词） pleased高兴的（形容词）‎ ‎ 12.own自己的（动词） owner 主人（名词）‎ ‎ 13.service服务（名词） serve 服务（动词）‎ ‎ 14.relax放松（动词） relaxed放松的（形容词）‎ ‎ 15.develop发展（动词） developed发展过了的（形容词） ‎ ‎ developing正在发展的（形容词） development发展（名词）‎ ‎ 16.describe 描述（动词） description 描述（名词） ‎ ‎ 17.attract 吸引（动词） attract ive有吸引力的（形容词）‎ attraction吸引、向往的地方（名词）‎ 二、重点短语 ‎1．not… any more / not… any longer/ no more / no longer 不再 ‎2. since then 从那时起 ‎ ‎3.move house 搬家 ‎ ‎4.move into a new flat 搬到新公寓 ‎ ‎5. get married结婚 ‎ ‎6. in the southern part of 在…的南部 ‎ ‎7.in the center of … 在…中心 ‎8.change a lot 变化很多 ‎ ‎9.turn …into … 把…变成 …‎ ‎10.play cards and Chinese chess 打牌和下中国象棋 ‎ ‎11.water pollution水污染 ‎12.be used to do sth 被用来做某事 ‎ ‎13.used to do sth 过去常常做某事 ‎14be used to doing sth 习惯做某事 ‎ ‎15.be used for doing sth被用来做某事 ‎16.take action to reduce the pollution 采取措施减少污染 ‎ ‎17. in some ways 在某些方面 ‎ ‎18.open space 开阔的地方 ‎ ‎19.feel a bit lonely感到有点孤独 ‎ ‎20.foom time to time 不时地 ‎ ‎21make me happy 使我快 ‎ ‎22.get to know 认识 ‎ ‎23 as well as 也 ‎ ‎24.as often as before像以前一样常常 ‎25.interview sb/ have an interview with sb 采访某人 ‎ ‎26. make a sentence with用… 造句 ‎27.alone / by oneself / on one’s own 独自 ‎ ‎28. in service 使用中，服务中 ‎29. dranking water 饮用水 ‎ ‎30. the change to Beijing 北京的变化 ‎ ‎31. by the way 顺便问一下 ‎ ‎32.in fact 事实上 ‎32.a place of natural beauty 一个自然美的地方 ‎ ‎33. lend sb sth 把某物借给某人 ‎34.travel to and from town 进出城镇 ‎ ‎35.most of them他们大部分 ‎36.have time to relax more有时间 多放松 ‎ ‎37.the same feeling 同感 ‎ ‎36.green hills around… 青山 环绕… ‎ ‎39.far from 离…远 ‎40.easier to get there 更易到那儿 ‎ ‎41. take photos 拍照 ‎ ‎42．because of illness because sb be ill 因为某人病了 ‎ 三、重点句型讲解 ‎1. Now the government has turned the place into a park..‎ ‎ turn…into…意思为‘把… 变成…可用 change…into…替换。例如：‎ ‎ I’m think of turning the flower garden into a vegetable field.我正考虑把花园改成菜地 ‎ 另外turn into=change into 例如：Water turns into ice in cold ‎ weather.在寒冷的天气水可变成冰 ‎2. …because the factory used to dump its waste into the river ‎ ‎ used to do sth意为 过去常常做某事 ，后跟动词原形，表示过去习惯、经常发生的动作或状态，而现在不复存在了 ‎ Peter used to walk to the factory.彼得过去常常步行去工厂。‎ ‎ There used to be an an old temple near the school.过去，在学校附近有座古庙。‎ ‎3. It’s difficult for him to see some of them as often as possible.‎ ‎ 此处为it’s+adj +for sb+ to do sth 句型，意为“对某人来说做某事是…的”。其中it 是形式主语，真正的主语是句中的动词不定式短语。例如：‎ ‎ It’s important for us to keep the water clean.对我们而言，保持水的清洁是很重要的。‎ ‎ It’s important for a dancer to be healthy. 对于一个舞蹈演员来说，保持健康是很重要的。‎ ‎4.He thinks he is lucky enough to see the changes to Shanghai.‎ ‎ 此处为：sb + be +adj +enough +to do sth意为“某人在某方面已经达到做某事的程度”。注意enough要放在形容词的后面。例如： ‎ Nick is strong enough to be a player.尼克身体很强壮，能够当运动员。‎ He is generous enough to give gifts to all of us .他很慷慨，给我们大家都买了礼物。‎ ‎5.I’ m happy that she has time to relax more.‎ ‎ have time to do sth 意为“有时间做某事”time前面可用 no, much, enough等词修饰 ‎ She has enough time to cook meals at home. 他有足够的时间在家做饭 I’m sorry I have no time to play with you. 对不起，我没时间和你玩。‎ 6. ‎. I enjoy chatting with you… enjoy doing sth意为“喜欢作某事”。具有类似用法的动词还有 ‎ ‎ finish, keep, mind, practice等。例如 ‎ The old man finished writing. 那位老人完成了写作。‎ I practice playing the piano every day. 我每天练习弹钢琴。‎ ‎7.….the environment is not as good as before 。‎ not … as…意为“不如…那么…”两个 as之间用形容词或副词原级。例如：‎ ‎ This man is not as fat as before. 这个男人不像以前那么胖了 ‎8.I must say that it’s the best model I have ever seen.我得说这是我所见过的最好的模型 ‎ 这里I have ever seen.用作定语，修饰前面的the best model 例如：‎ ‎ The present that I gave you is made in Japan. 我给你的礼物是日本产的.‎ ‎9... Let me show you how to get to the railway station…‎ ‎ “ show sb+疑问词+动词不定式”是动词 shown的常用结构。例如：‎ ‎ I’ll show him how to do that. 我已教他如何去做。‎ ‎ I’ll show you where to go. 我来告诉你该往哪走。‎ ‎10.since 1958 自1958年以来 ‎ since为介词，意为：自…以来，说明某事开始的时间，后接点时间，如：‎ ‎ He hasn’t been home since1978. 自1978年以来，他没有回过家。‎ ‎ I’ve lived here since childhood. 我从小就住在这儿。‎ ‎ The little dog has been dead since 2 days ago. 这条小狗死了两天了 ‎ since 可做连词，引导时间状语从句，从句常用一般过去时，主句一般用 一般现在时或者现在完成时，意为：自…以来如：We have never seen each other since he left here。自他离开这儿以来，我们彼此从未见面。‎ ‎ It is just a week since we arrived here 。自从我们到这儿以来，刚好有一周了 ‎ since 做连词时还有另外一个意思，即：既然，由于。引导原因状语从句，常置句首，指双 ‎ ‎ 方都知道的原因，语气比because弱。如：‎ ‎ Since you are going ，I will go too。 既然你要去，那么我也去。‎ ‎ Since he says so， it must be true。既然他这么说，那一定是真的。‎ ‎11.语法 现在完成时（一）‎ 用法：（一）现在完成时表示过去发生或已完成的某一动作对现在造成的影响或结果。与其连用的时间状语有：already ever just never yet recently 例如：I have already opened the window. 我已把窗户打开。‎ She won’t go to the cinema tonight because she has already seen it.‎ 她今晚不去看电影，因为她已经看过了 构成：‎ 1. 肯定式构成： have/has+动词过去分词。‎ 2. 否定式构成： have/has+not+动词过去分词。have/has与not可分别缩写为haven’t, hasn’t例如：‎ ‎ Miss Hu hasn’tcome back yet. 胡小姐还没回来。‎ 3. 疑问句的构成：‎ ‎ 将have/has提到主语前，简略答语用：Yes，主语+ have/has或No，主语 +haven’t/hasn’t . ‎ ‎ 例如Have you ever made cakes？ Yes，I have. No，I haven’t.‎ ‎4.在现在完成时的各种结构中，have/has均为助动词，无实际意义。当主语是第三人称单数时 ‎ ‎ 要用has。‎ ‎ have/has之后要用动词的过去分词，规则动词的过去分词与过去式的变化规则相同，如：‎ ‎ finish—finished courage— couraged study—studied step—stepped clap—clapped skim——skimmed ‎5.不规则动词的过去分词的变化基本可分为下列五种类型：‎ ‎1）.AAA (动词原形、过去式与过去分词同形)如：cut——cut——cut read—— read—— read ‎2） ABB（过去式过与去分词同形）如：buy ——bought——bought teach ——taught——taught ‎3.）ABC(动词原形、过去式与过去分词各异) 如：‎ drive ——drove—— driven grow——grew——grown ‎4.）ABA (动词原形与过去分词同形) 如：come——came——come run——ran_——run ‎5.）AAB(动词原形与过去式同形) 如：beat——beat——beaten 四、单元话题：‎ ‎ 写关于过去和现在所发生的短文，有三个原则：一、要概括说明发生的变化二、要详细描写发生的变化，在描写变化的过程中可使用however，but等表示转折的连词，是行文自然流畅。三、要对所发生的变化发表自己的看法。‎ ‎ My hometown ,Nantong ,is an economic development zone near the sea, with a population of three hundred thousand.‎ ‎ It used to be a fishing village. There was no industry.And there were only a few primary schools.‎ ‎ Since the end of the 20th century, a lot of foreign businessmen have invested here. A lot of ‎ factories and a big port have been built. The port connects Nantong with other places both in and out of our country.‎ ‎ I’m sure in the near future our hometown will become beautiful.‎ ‎8B Unit 2 知识梳理 一、词汇 1. perform 表演（动词） performer 表演者（名词） performance 表演（名词）‎ 2. shine 闪耀，闪烁（动词） shiny 闪烁的（形容词）‎ 3. ‎ harm伤害（动词） harmful 有害的（形容词） harmless无害的（形容词）‎ 4. Help帮助（动词） helpful有帮助的 乐于助人的（形容词） ‎ ‎ helpless 无助的（形容词） helpfully有帮助地（副词）‎ 5. use使用（动词） useful 有用的（形容词） ‎ ‎ useless 无用的（形容词） usefully有用地（副词）‎ ‎ 6. delight高兴（名词） delightful高兴的（形容词）‎ ‎ 7. excite 使兴奋（动词） excited 兴奋的（形容词） ‎ ‎ exciteing令人兴奋的（形容词） excitement兴奋（名词） ‎ ‎ 8.end 尽头，末尾（名词） endless无尽的（形容词）‎ ‎ 9.success 成功（名词） successful成功的（形容词） ‎ successfully成功地（副词） ‎ ‎ unsuccessful不成功的（形容词） unsuccessfully不成功地（副词）‎ ‎ 10.hope 希望（动词） hopeful 有希望的（形容词）‎ ‎ hopeless无望的（形容词） hopefully 有希望地（副词）‎ ‎ 11.experience经历，经验（动词，名词） experienced有经验的（形容词）‎ ‎ 12.culture文化（名词） cultural 文化的（形容词）‎ ‎ 13.state 陈述，说明（动词） statement陈述，说明（名词）‎ ‎ 14.clear清楚地，清澈的（形容词） clearly清楚地（副词）‎ 二、词组 ‎1.go on a trip to…去旅游 ‎ ‎2. take you out把 带出去 ‎3.come on快点 ‎ ‎4. have a fantastic time度过愉快的时光 ‎5..by underground 乘地铁 ‎ ‎6. be away from远离。。。‎ ‎7.by the way 顺便问一下 ‎ ‎8.have a bird’s-eye view鸟瞰 ‎9.a symbol of 。。。的标志 ‎ ‎10. at the entrance 在入口处 ‎11.at high speed高速 ‎ ‎12. stop doing sth停止做某事 ‎13.stop to do sth停下来做某事 ‎ ‎14. later in the afternoon下午的晚些时候 ‎15.wave to sb 向某人挥手 ‎ ‎16. all the way一路上 ‎17.scream with joy高兴地尖叫起来 ‎ ‎18.at the end of在...末尾、尽头 ‎19.march along 沿...游行 ‎ ‎20. march across游行穿过 ‎21.show sb sth/ sth to sb把某物给某人看 ‎ ‎22.In all总共 ‎23. has/have been to去过某地 ‎ ‎24.has/have gone to 去某地 ‎ ‎25.go hiking去远足 ‎ ‎26.Chinese gardens中国园林 三、重点句型讲解 ‎1. It must be fun. Can I join you?在这个句子中， Must表示肯定的或有把握的推测，意为：一定，准是.例如：‎ This must be the book you want . 这一定是你想要的那本书。‎ 表示否定的推测用can’t ，意为：不可能。例如：Our English teacher can’t be in the office.He has gone to Beijing.我们英语老师不可能在办公室。他去北京了。‎ ‎2.I couldn/t stop taking photos with them. ‎ ‎ couldn’t stop doing sth可与 couldn’t help doing sth 作同意句转换。因此，原句可改为：‎ ‎ I couldn/t help taking photos with them..‎ ‎ 另外：stop to do sth 表示:停下来做某事。这里的 to do sth 做目的状语。例如：‎ The boy stopped to listen ,but they heard nothing. 男孩停下来听，但什么也没听到。‎ ‎ stop… (from)doing sth 表示:阻止…做某事 ‎ ‎ The heavy rain stopped them (from) going out . 大雨 阻碍了他们外出 1. I’ll show them to you when I come back.. show sth to sb =show sb sth sth 把某物给某人看 ，‎ ‎ 但当sth 是人称代词 it them 时，只能用 .show sth to sb 结构。例如： ‎ ‎ Would you show me another one ?= Would you show another one to me?‎ 2. It seems he hasn’t come back yet。看样子他还没回来。‎ ‎ seem表示：似乎，好像，其后可接句子，形容词或动词不定式，例如：‎ ‎ Everyone seems very busy except us. 除了我们，大家好像都很忙 ‎ He seems to know what he is doing？他似乎知道他在做什么？‎ ‎ It seems that there is something wrong with this computer.他的电脑似乎坏了。‎ 3. It was really wonderful to have a bird’s -eye view of Hong Kong —a mordern city of tall buidings with lights shining in the evening.‎ ‎ 在傍晚，鸟瞰香港这个高楼林立、灯火通明的现代化都市，感觉真是美好 ‎ have a bird’s -eye view of意为：鸟瞰。。。‎ ‎ with lights shining 在句子中作后置定语。例如：‎ ‎ At Christmas in the western countries，you can see Christmas tree with colourful lights shining ‎ ‎ on them.在西方国家的圣诞节，你可以看到彩灯闪耀的圣诞树。‎ ‎4. It was fun to see so manyelephants marching down the street.看见那么多大象在街上行进真有趣。‎ ‎ It is fun todo sth是一常用句型，意为：做某事是有趣的。例如：‎ ‎ It is fun to fly to the moon in the spaceship. 乘宇宙飞船去月球真有趣。‎ ‎ see sb doing sth意为：看见某人正在做某事。强调动作正在进行。see sb do sth意为：‎ ‎ 看见某人做某事。强调动作已完成。试比较 ‎ I saw him playing football on the playground. 我看见他正在操场上踢足球。‎ ‎ I saw him play football on the playground. 我看见他正在操场上踢足球。（已踢完，现在不踢了）‎ ‎ so, such这两个词都有如此、这样 的意思。so修饰形容词或副词，，such 修饰名词，但如果 ‎ ‎ 名词前有much many little few 等词修饰时，不能用such。例如：‎ ‎ The weather is so fine these days. 这些天天气很好 ‎ I have never seen such an interesting film. 我从未看过这样有趣的电影。‎ ‎ It is exciting to see so many places of interest. 参观这么多的名胜古迹是令人兴奋的。‎ ‎6.语法 现在完成时（二）‎ 用法：（ 二）现在完成时表示动作发生在过去并且一直持续到现在的动作或状态。与其连用的时间状语有：so far，since+过去时间/从句，for+一段时间。例如：‎ They have planted the trees since last year.他们从去年起开始植树。‎ ‎▲have been to与 have gone to ‎ 如何区分 Have been to与 have gone to ，请看：‎ ‎[例句欣赏]‎ ‎1．I have just been to the post office .我刚刚去过邮局。‎ ‎2. My sister has never been to Guangzhou.我妹妹从未去过广州。‎ ‎3.They have been to Japan twice.他们去过日本两次。‎ ‎4.--Where are they? 他们在哪？‎ ‎ --They have gone to Hawaii for their holiday. 他们去夏威夷度假了。‎ ‎5．It can’t be John. He has gone to the town.那不可能是月翰，他去镇上了。‎ ‎[用法小结]‎ Have been to 意为“曾经去过某地”，表示现在不在那了。可与just, ever, never 等时间状语连用，‎ 也可接次数，表示去过某地几次，如例句1，2，3，。Have gone to 意为“到某地去了”表示说话 那个人不在现场，而是到了某地，或是在某地的途中，例如句4，5。‎ 温馨提示：当have been /gone to 后接地点副词here, there 等时，应去掉介词to. 例如：‎ ‎--Have you ever been to Qingdao?你去过青岛吗？‎ ‎--Yes, I’ve been there once.是的，我去过那里一次。‎ 终止性动词与延续行动词 终止性动词，又称短暂性动词或非延续行动词，它所表示的动词通常在一瞬间就能完成，不能 与表示一段时间的状语连用。如：‎ I have left Beijing .(Yes)‎ I have left Beijing for three days.(No)‎ 延续行动词表示动词可以延续一段时间，能够和表示一段时间的状语连用。如；‎ Uncle Wang has lived in the city for five year.‎ ‎ 终止性动词只有转换成能够持续表示意义的动词或短语才能与表示一段时间的状语连用。那么，‎ ‎▲应该如何转换？常用的方法主要有以下几种：‎ ‎1.转换成： be+名词/形容词/副词/介词短语这种系表结构。如：‎ join the army –be a soldier/in the army ,die—be dead ,leave—be away， arrive---be in/ at get married——be married begin start——be oncome go ——be in/ at stop—be over等。‎ 如：The man took park in the Party 10years ago .‎ I left Beijing three days ago.—I have been away from Beijing for three days. ‎ ‎2.用延续行动词替换非延续行动词。‎ ‎:borrow—keep, buy ---have 等。 ‎ 如：Millie borrowed this book a week ago.--Millie has kept this book for a week.‎ I bought the new computer a month ago.--I have had the new computer since a month ago.‎ ‎3.用：It is /has been +一段时间+since+从句[谓语动词用一般过去时]表示。‎ 如：She joined the club two yeas ago .--It is two yeas since she joined the club.‎ ‎4.用：一般时间+has passed+ since+从句[谓语动词用一般过去时]表示。‎ 如：Alan came here six months ago.--Six months has passed since Alan came here.‎ ‎5. He died 3days ago。同意句为：‎ He has been dead for 3 days He has been dead since 3 days ago It is 3 days since he died It has been 3 days since he died 四、单元话题 记述游记应该先交代时间、地点和人物。接着按照时间顺序，叙述游程中的趣事。写游记要避免写成流水账，可用一些表示时间顺序的词或短语，如：first，then，finally等连接句子，‎ 起到承上启下的作用。每描述一件事时，可做简单评论。注意的是，写游记要用一般过去时。‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ Last summer holiday ,my parents and I went to disney land. We had a good time there.First we went to the Cartoon World and saw Donald Duck and Mickey Mouse there.They were so lovely that I spend a lot of time playing with them,then we went to Sleeping Beauty Castle. Sleeping Beauty was so pretty that ‎ we couldn’t stop taking photos with her .‎ ‎ In the evening, we had some western food there and I bought a Mickey Mouse purse for my friend .Atlast, my parents bought some stationery as souvenirs for me .What a wonderful time we had !‎ ‎8B Unit 3 知识梳理 一. 重点单词 A.四会单词 ‎1．online adj. 联网的，在线的 2.television n.. 电视=TV ‎3. program n. 电脑程序 4. role n 角色 ‎ ‎5. point n 分数 .6. level n.等级 ‎7. knowledge n.知识 8. grammar n. 语法 ‎9. reach v 到达 10.screen n.屏幕 ‎11. pass v 通过 12.mark v 做标记 ‎13. purple n./adj. 紫色，紫色的 14.keyboard n. 键盘 ‎15. menu n. 菜单 16.mouse n.鼠标 ‎17.e-dictionary n. 电子词典 18.restart v 重新启动 ‎19.connect v 连接 20. foot n. 英尺 ‎21.total n. 总数，总和 22.free adj 自由的 ‎23. Mars n. 火星 24.set v 设置背景 ‎25.daily adj 每日的 ，日常的 26.course n. 课程 ‎27. telephone n.电话 28.tour n. 旅行 ‎29. radio n. 收音机 30. package n.一套东西，包裹 ‎31. cover v 涉及，包括 32. order v订购 ‎33. simple adj. 简单的 34.save v 保存 ‎3. control v 控制， 支配 B. 词形转换 ‎1．educational adj—educate v—education n. 2. designer n—design v ‎ ‎3. travel v —traveled —traveller n ‎ ‎4. asleep .adj—sleep v—slept—slept—sleepy adj. ‎ ‎5.correct---correctly—incorrect–--incorrectly 6.foot—feet ‎ ‎7.produce v—producer n—product n—production n ‎ ‎8. create v—creative adj—creation n 二．重点词组 ‎1.look like看起来像 ‎ ‎2.the remote control遥控器 ‎ ‎3.turn on 打开 ‎ ‎4.turn off关上 ‎ ‎5.turn up声音调大 ‎ ‎6.turn down声音调小 ‎ ‎7.change the channel换频道 ‎ ‎8. a writing competition作文竞赛 ‎ ‎9.want to do sth想要做某事 ‎ ‎10.educational CD-ROM教育光盘 ‎ ‎11.learn more about computers了解关于更多电脑的知识 ‎ ‎12.the different uses of computers电脑的不同用途 ‎ ‎13.draw and design绘画和设计 ‎ ‎14.play games玩游戏 ‎ ‎15.search for the information寻找信息 ‎ ‎16.send and receive e-mails发送和接收电子邮件 ‎ ‎17.word processing文字处理 ‎ ‎18.write computer programs编写电脑程序 ‎ ‎19.(travel) around the world in eight hours八小时环游全世界 ‎ ‎20.come out 出版,发行 ‎ ‎21.help sb (to) do sth帮助某人做某事 ‎ ‎22.help sb with sth在某方面帮助某人 ‎ ‎23.at the same time同时 ‎ ‎24.main charater主要角色 ‎ ‎25.a thirteen-year-old boy一个13岁大的男孩 ‎ ‎26.love travelling喜欢旅行 ‎ ‎27.one day某天 ‎ ‎28.look at the beautiful sky看美丽的天空 ‎ ‎29.fall asleep睡着了 ‎ ‎30.have a very strange dream做了一个奇怪的梦 ‎ ‎31.in one’s dream在某人的梦里 ‎ ‎32.a golden cloud一片金色的云 ‎ ‎33.get a point得一分 ‎ ‎34.every time每次 ‎ ‎35.get enough points得到足够的分数 ‎ ‎36.come down下来 ‎ ‎37.carry off to带….到…. ‎ ‎38.play the role of扮演……的角色 ‎ ‎39.the knowledge of English grammar and vocabulary英语语法和词汇的知识 ‎ ‎40.a lot of useful information很多有用的信息 ‎ ‎41.for example例如 ‎ ‎42.many other interesting places许多其他的名胜 ‎ ‎43.pass a level通过一级 ‎ ‎44.a map of the world一张世界地图 ‎ ‎45.find out发现,弄清楚 ‎ ‎46.sell out 买完 ‎ ‎47.start/begin with以……开始 ‎ ‎48.none of them他们中没有一个 ‎ ‎49.on the screen在屏幕上 ‎ ‎50.on the computer 在电脑上 ‎ ‎51.send sb sth=send sth to sb把某物送给某人 ‎ ‎52.print out打印出 ‎ ‎53.click on点击 ‎ ‎54.let sb do sth让某人做某事 ‎ ‎55.do some exercises做练习 ‎ ‎56.mind doing sth介意做某事 ‎ ‎57.not at all根本不 ‎ ‎58.on the television在电视上 ‎ ‎59.many new kinds of computers许多新种类的电脑 ‎ ‎60.go to the cinema=see a film去电影院/看电影 ‎ ‎61.keep sb doing sth使某人一直做某事 ‎ ‎62.need sb to do sth需要某人做某事 ‎ ‎63.thanks for doing sth感谢做某事 ‎ ‎64.agree to do sth同意做某事 ‎ ‎65.agree with sb同意某人的意见 ‎ ‎66.do shopping online网上购物 ‎ ‎67.in the short play在短剧中 ‎ ‎68.Would you please do sth?你愿意做某事吗? ‎ ‎69.take place 发生 ‎ ‎70.look worried看起来焦虑 ‎ ‎71.as soon as一…就 ‎ ‎72.go to bed 上床睡觉 ‎ ‎73.laugh at嘲笑 ‎ ‎74.all over the world全世界 ‎ ‎75.in the dining hall在餐厅 ‎ ‎76.fall off the bike从车上摔下来 ‎ ‎77.store the information存储信息 ‎ ‎ 78.a floppy disk软盘 ‎ ‎79.a hard disk硬盘 ‎ ‎80.be made of+可看出材料的(由…制造) (The desk is made of wood.) ‎ ‎81.be made from+不可看出材料的(The paper is made of grass.) ‎ ‎82.be made in+地点(The Tv is made in Japan.) ‎ ‎83.What happened to sb? 某人发生了…. ‎ ‎84.knock at the door敲门 ‎ ‎85.plan to do sth计划做某事 ‎ ‎86.watch a football game观看足球比赛 ‎ ‎87.make sb do sth使某人做某事 ‎ ‎88.need doing=need to be done需要做… (My hair needs cutting.=My hair needs to be cut.) ‎ ‎89.restart the computer从新启动电脑 ‎ ‎90.wake up唤醒 ‎ ‎91.take a trip to+地点 去某地旅行 ‎ ‎92.prepare to do sth准备做… ‎ ‎93.prepare sth准备某物 ‎ ‎94.prepare for sth为某事做准备 ‎ ‎95.be prepared to do sth准备做某事 ‎ ‎96.work out计算出 ‎ ‎97.choose to do sth选择做某事 ‎ ‎98.prefer to do sth宁愿做某事(I prefer to swim here.) ‎ ‎99.prefer sth喜欢某物(I prefer the kind apple.) ‎ ‎100.prefer A to B宁愿要A不要B(I prefer apples to oranges .) ‎ ‎101.prefer doing sth to doing sth宁愿做某事不做某事(I prefer swimming to skating.) ‎ ‎102.warn sb to do sth 警告某人做某事 ‎ ‎103.warn sb not to do sth警告某人不做某事 ‎ ‎104.on one’s way home在某人回家可路上 ‎ ‎105.look out of the window向窗外望去 ‎ ‎106.the sports meeting运动会 ‎ ‎107.put off推迟,延期 ‎ ‎108.have a good(great,nice,wonderful) time 玩得开心 ‎ ‎109.national treasure国宝 ‎ 三．重点句子 ‎ ‎1.I have no idea.=I don’t know.我不知道.‎ ‎2.It looks like a television.它看起来像一台电视.(look like )‎ ‎3. What do you usually use your computer for?你通常用你的电脑来做什么?‎ What…for?=Why…?‎ Eg. What do you buy the computer for ?你买电脑干什么？‎ ‎ Why do you buy the computer? 你为什么买电脑？‎ ‎4. I usually use it to search for information.=I usually use it for searching for information.‎ 我通常用它来查找信息.‎ be used for doing sth=be used to do sth eg. The knife is used for cutting apples.=The knife is used to cut apples. 刀子是用来切苹果的。‎ ‎5.Because it’s fast and easy.它既快捷又方便。‎ ‎6. When you have got enough points, a cloud will come down and carry you off to a place you have never visited before.当你得到足够的分数,一片云会下来把你带到一个你以前从未去过的地方.‎ 名词放在enough后，如enough points, 而形容词放在其前，如good enough ‎ 画线处是一个定语从句，you have never visited before 来限定前边的a place ‎ ‎7.When you play this game, you will play the role of Itchy Feet.‎ 当你玩这个游戏的时候,你将扮演痒痒脚的人.‎ play the role of 扮演…..的角色，of后是所扮演的角色 ‎8. Each level will take you about an hour to finish.每个等级会花你一个小时的时间去完成.‎ It takes sb some time to do sth./It took sb some time to do sth./ It will take sb some time to do sth.‎ 花某人多少时间做某事，如：‎ It takes me 2 hours to finish my homework.‎ It took me 2 hours to finish my homework.‎ It will take me 2 hours to finish my homework.‎ ‎9. The CD-ROM helps you learn English by testing your knowledge of English grammar and vocabulary.这个光盘帮助你通过检测你的英语语法和词汇知识来学习英语.‎ ‎10. The places you have visited are marked in bright purple.你去过的地方用亮紫色标记下来.‎ ‎11.The game starts with the main character having dinner.这个游戏一主角吃饭开始.‎ Start with=begin with 以….开始 ‎12. It sounds interesting.它听起来有趣.‎ Sound 是连系动词，后面加形容词 ‎13. These places are always crowded with people.这些地方总是挤满了人.‎ be crowded with ‎14. The more they lose, the more they want to win.他们输的越多,他们想赢的就越多.‎ 两个形容词或副词的比较级连用，表示越怎么就越怎么， 如：‎ The harder you work, the more money you get. 你工作越努力，你得到的钱就越多。‎ ‎15. They have no interest in their lessons.他们对他们的功课不感兴趣.‎ be interested in 对…感兴趣/ have no interest in 对… 没兴趣 如：‎ We are interested in watching English films.我们都很感兴趣看英语电影。‎ They have no interest in reading this book. 他们都没有兴趣阅读这本书。‎ ‎16. The Great Wall is one of the eight wonders in the world.长城是世界八大奇迹之一.‎ One of 后一定要加上名词或代词的复数形式，如one of the teachers, one of the students,但它们做主语时后面的谓语动词要用第三人称单数形式，如 One of the teachers is from America.老师们当中有一人是来自美国。‎ ‎17. It’s impolite to laugh at those in trouble.嘲笑身处困境的人们是不礼貌的.‎ It is +adj to do sth. 如：‎ It is impossible to finish the work within a day.在一天之内完成这份工作是不可能的。‎ ‎18. My life dream is to travel around the world and sing for people.‎ 我生活的理想是环游全世界并为人民歌唱.‎ 这地方是动词不定式作表语。‎ 如：My duty is to clean the floor every day.我的责任是每天扫地。‎ ‎19. If you see him tomorrow, please ask him if he will go to work on the farm with ‎ us.如果你明天看到他,请问他是否将和我们去农场工作.‎ 这地方是由if 引导的宾语从句。如：‎ I want to know if you will visit our school. 我想知道是否你将参观我们的学校。‎ ‎20. She is a great woman with a lot of knowledge.她是一个学识渊博的伟大女性.‎ 介词短语做后置定语 四，话题作文 根据要点提示，以“A Computer Made in My Home” 为题，用简洁的语言描述电脑组装的全过程。‎ ‎1.我家有一台自己组装的电脑。‎ ‎2.我爸爸是个电脑迷。昨天下午，他从南京带回两个大箱子，里面有各种各样的电脑零件。这些零件被爸爸组装起来，键盘与电脑连起来，电脑打开后，屏幕上出现了信息。我很高兴，长时间的搜寻信息。‎ ‎3.同学中没有一个有自制电脑的，爸爸真了不起，我要向爸爸学习，我做了个梦，梦见自己的家变成了一个电脑加工厂 A Computer Made in My Home ‎______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ 范文 A Computer Made in My Home I have a new computer. It was made in my home.‎ My dad is a computer fan . He came back from Nanjing with two big boxes yesterday afternoon. I couldn’t wait to open them. There were all kinds of computer parts in them. Quickly, the parts were put together by him. And then the keyboard was connected to the computer. After the computer was turned on, some information appeared on the screen . I was so happy that more information was searched for for a long time.‎ There is a home-made computer in none of my classmates’homes. My dad is very great! I must learn from him. Last night , I had a dream and dreamed my home had been changed into a big computer factory.‎ ‎8B Unit 4 知识梳理 一．重点单词 A. 四会单词 ‎1. leaflet n. 传单 2. cat n.猫科动物 ‎3. camera n. 照相机，摄象机 4.pop adj. 流行音乐的 ‎5. job n. 工作，任务 6. introduce v 介绍 ‎7. duty n.. 责任，职责，义务 8. event n.活动，事件 ‎9. fan n. 迷，狂热爱好者 10. seem v 好象，似乎，看来 ‎11. business n. 企业，商行，工厂12.public adj. 公开的 ‎13.voice n. 嗓音 14. hang v 悬挂，吊 ‎15. speaker n. 扬声器，喇叭 16. among prep. 当中在……‎ ‎17. phone v 打电话 18. kid n 小孩 ‎19. break n 休息 20. speech n. 演讲 ‎21. purpose n. 目标 22.rise v 升起 B.词形转换 22. advertise v—advertisement n 2. host v—hostess n ‎ ‎ 3. introduce v—introduction n 4. organization n—organize v ‎5. actor n.—actress n—act v 6. perform v—performance n ‎7.arrangement n—arrange v 8. speaker n—speak v ‎ 9. education n—educational adj—educate v ‎ ‎10. snowy adj—snow n/v 11. silent adj—silence n ‎ ‎ 12. break—broke—broken 13.rise—rose—risen 二．重点词组 ‎1.a charity show 慈善表演 ‎ ‎2. hold a microphone 拿着话筒 ‎ ‎3. be chosen to do sth 被选做某事 ‎ ‎4. many ways to raise money 许多募集钱的方法 ‎ ‎5. organize a charity show 组织一次慈善演出 ‎ ‎6. make a poster 制作一张海报 ‎ ‎7. prepare for sth 为某事而做准备 ‎ ‎8. be prepared to do sth 准备做某事 ‎ ‎9. prepare sth 准备某事 ‎ ‎10. ask sb to do sth 要求某人做某事 ‎ ‎11.donate money 捐钱 ‎ ‎12.raise money 募集钱 ‎ ‎13.learn more about 了解更多关于 ‎ ‎14.write to sb 写信给某人 ‎ ‎15.need to do sth 需要做某事 ‎ ‎16.free time 空余时间 ‎ ‎17.because of 因为 ‎ ‎18.start/begin doing sth 开始做某事 ‎ ‎19.introduce sb 介绍某人 ‎ ‎20.be happy to do sth 高兴做某事 ‎ ‎21.practise a lot 大量练习 ‎ ‎22.have to do sth 不得不做某事 ‎ ‎23.remember doing sth 记得做过某事 ‎ ‎24.remember to do sth 记得要做某事 ‎ ‎25.at the right time 在恰当的时间 ‎ ‎26.in the beginning 在开始 ‎ ‎27.be able to do sth 能够做某事 ‎ ‎28.at the same time 在同一时间 ‎ ‎29.make a lot of noise 发出很多噪音 ‎ ‎30.seem to do sth 似乎做某事 ‎ ‎31.invite sb to do sth 邀请某人做某事 ‎ ‎32.take part in 参加 ‎ ‎33.hope to do sth 希望做某事 ‎ ‎34.at least 至少 ‎ ‎35.in the school hall 在学校的礼堂 ‎ ‎36.be glad to do sth 高兴做某事 ‎ ‎37.tell sb about sth 告诉某人关于某事 ‎ ‎38.be interested 对……感兴趣 ‎ ‎39.great fun 有趣 ‎ ‎40.some children in poor areas 一些贫穷地方的孩子 ‎ ‎41.pay for 支付 ‎ ‎42.let sb do sth 让某人做某事 ‎ ‎43.know more about 知道更多关于 ‎ ‎44.decide to do sth 决定做某事 ‎ ‎45.the host of the show 演出的主持 ‎ ‎46.how to do sth 怎样做某事 ‎ ‎47.would like to do sth 想要做某事 ‎ ‎48.learn to do sth 学习做某事 ‎ ‎49.the ticket for a charity 慈善会门票 ‎ ‎50.the ticket to Shanghai 去上海的门票 ‎ ‎51.at the end of 在最后 三．重点句子 ‎1. I’ve been chosen to be the host of a charity show.我曾经被选择做慈善表演的主持。‎ ‎（be chosen to do sth）被选择做某事， 如：‎ He is chosen to help the boy with his English . 他被选去帮助那个男孩学英语。‎ ‎2. We should give out leaflets to ask people to donate money.我们应该发传单来要求人们捐钱。‎ ‎（give out ask sb to do sth donate money）‎ ‎3. Why don’t we organize a charity show ?为什么我们不举行一个慈善演出呢？‎ ‎（Why not do sth?=Why don’t you(we) do sth?）为什么不做某事 如：‎ Why not go out for a walk?=Why don’t we go out for a walk? 为什么不出去散步呢？‎ ‎4.We started working on the show two month ago.两个月前，我们开始准备这个演出。‎ ‎5. It was my job to introduce each star.我的工作是介绍每位明星。‎ 这个句子还可以改成：My job is to introduce each star.‎ ‎6. I had to remember to look at the right camera at the right time .我必须记得在合适的时间看对摄象机。‎ ‎（have to do sth/ remember to do sth）不得不做某事/ 记得要去做某事 如：‎ I have to get up early to catch up with the early bus.我不得不早起来赶早班车。‎ Remember to lock the door when you leave the classroom. 当你离开教室的时候，记得要锁门。‎ ‎7.Will it be a success?它会成功吗？（success指具体的成功的人或事时为可数名词）‎ ‎8.I kept asking myself .我一直在问我自己。（keep doing sth ）一直在做某事，如：‎ He keeps reading that story book the whole day. 他一整天都在读那本书。‎ ‎9. Everything seemed to happen so fast. 一切似乎发生地太快。‎ ‎（seem to do sth /happen无被动）如：‎ It seems to rain .天似乎要下雨了。‎ It seems that it will rain.‎ ‎10.I hope more events like this will be organized to raise money for charity and I think more people should be invited to take part in them.我希望有更多这样的事情被举办来为慈善募集钱 ‎ 款，并且我认为应该邀请更多的人参与其中。‎ ‎（hope to do sth/hope that /raise money/ invite sb to do sth /take part in）‎ ‎11. It was great fun to be a host. 当一位主持人真得有趣。‎ ‎12. Some children in poor areas do not have money to go to school.一些贫穷地方的孩子没钱去上学。‎ ‎13. We believe it will be a success.我相信它会成功的。‎ ‎14. A lot of work need to be done.有很多工作要做。（need to do sth）‎ ‎15. We wanted to raise money for Project Hope.我想为希望工程募集钱。‎ ‎（want to do sth/ raise money）‎ ‎16. The host came on stage with a microphone in his hand and began to introduce the stars.主持人手拿话筒走到台上开始介绍明星。‎ ‎（with a microphone in his hand/ begin to do sth）‎ ‎17.After a few songs, there was a break.几首歌后，片刻休息了一下。‎ break 此处是名词，意思是“休息”，它还可以作动词“打破” 如：‎ break the silence 打破沉默break the law 违反法律 break the promise违背诺言 break-broke –broken broken 还可以做形容词“破的 ” a broken glass 一只破的玻璃杯 ‎18. Only if you sleep less during the day. 只有你白天少睡点。‎ only if 意思是“只有”如：---Can I join the charity walk? 我可以参加慈善步行吗？‎ ‎---Only if you are over 18 years old. 只有年满18岁才行。‎ ‎19．I was helping with a charity show to raise money for Project Hope.‎ 我那时给一个为绿色希望工程筹钱的慈善演出帮忙。‎ help with 意思是“在……方面帮忙”‎ 如：Amy always helps with housework. 艾米总是帮忙做家务活。‎ raise money for 意思是“为……筹钱”如：‎ We are raising money for charities. 我们为慈善机构募捐。‎ ‎20. “ Will it be a success?” I kept asking myself .“会成功吗？”我不停地问我自己。‎ ‎ success 是“胜利，成功”，be a success=be successful keep doing sth. 是“不断地做某事”‎ 如：Don’t keeping asking silly questions. 不要一直问愚蠢的问题。‎ ‎★21. 被动语态的构成方式：be + 过去分词，口语只也有用get / become + 过去分词表示。被动语态的基本用法：不知道或没必要提到动作的执行者是谁时用被动语态。强调或突出动作的承受者常用被动语态（by短语有时可以省略）。‎ ‎（1）使用被动语态时应注意的几个问题。‎ ‎①主动变化被动时双宾语的变化。看下列例句。‎ My friend gave me an interesting book on my birthday.‎ An interesting book was given to me(by my friend)on my birthday.‎ I was given an interesting book (by my friend)on my birthday.‎ ‎②主动变被动时，宾补成主补（位置不变）；（作补语的）不定式前需加to。‎ The boss made him work all day long.He was made to work all day long(by the boss)‎ ‎③短语动词变被动语态时，勿要掉“尾巴”。‎ The children were taken good care of (by her).‎ Your pronunciation and spelling should be paid attention to.‎ ‎④情态动词和be going to、be to、be sure to、used to、have to、had better等结构变被动语态，只需将它们后面的动词原形变为be +过去分词。‎ ‎（2）不能用被动语态的几种情况。‎ ‎①所有的不及物动词或不及物动词词组不能用于被动语态之中。‎ ‎②表示状态的谓语动词，如：last、hold、benefit、contain、equal、fit、join、mean、last、 look like、consist to等。‎ ‎③表示归属的动词，如have、own、belong to等。‎ ‎④表示“希望、意图”的动词，如：wish、want、hope、like、love、hate等。‎ ‎⑤宾语是反身代词或相互代词时谓语动词用主动语态，不能用被动语态。‎ ‎⑥宾语是同源宾语，不定式、动名词等谓语动词不用被动语态。‎ ‎⑦有些动词以其主动形式表示被动意义，特别是当主语是物时，常见的动词有sell、write、wash、open、lock等。‎ ‎（3）主动形式表被动意义。‎ ‎①当feel、look、smell、taste、sound等后面接形容词时；当cut、read、sell、wear、write等词带状语修饰语时；当动词表示“开始、结束、关、停、转、启动”等意义时。‎ This kind of cloth washes easily.这种布易洗。‎ These novels won’t sell well.这些小说不畅销。‎ My pen writes smoothly.我的钢笔写起来很流畅。‎ The door won’t lock.门锁不上。‎ The fish smells good.鱼闻起来香。‎ ‎②当break out、take place、shut off、turn off、work out等动词表示“发生、关闭、制定”等意思时。‎ The plan worked out successfully.‎ The lamps on the wall turn off.‎ ‎③want, require, need后面的动名词用主动表示被动含义。‎ ‎④be worth doing用主动形式表示被动含义。‎ ‎⑤在“be + 形容词 + to do”中，不定式的逻辑宾语是句子的主语，用主动代被动。‎ The girl isn’t easy to get along with.另外：be to blame(受谴责)，‎ ‎（4）被动形式表示主动意义的几种情况。‎ ‎①be seated坐着He is seated on a bench.（He seats himself on a bench.）坐在凳子上。‎ ‎②be hidden躲藏He was hidden behind the door.(He hid himself behind the door.)他藏在门后。‎ ‎③be lost迷路 ④be drunk喝醉 ⑤be dressed穿着The girl was dressed in a red short skirt.‎ 四，书面表达 假如你是王林，你所在学校的爱心俱乐部（Helping Hands Club）将吸收新会员，你想参加，根据自己的情况写一封自荐信。‎ Dear Chairman ‎____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ Yours,‎ Wang Lin 范文 Dear Chairman ‎ I am a boy student from Class1, Grade3. I’d like to be a member of the Helping Handing Club. I am healthy. I work hard at my lessons. I like helping others. I get on well with my classmates and often help them with their lessons. On my way home ,I often help old people cross the street. On the bus ,I always give my seat to women with babies . Sometimes, I pick up rubbish in the park.‎ ‎ If I join the club, I will be able to make more friends. Besides, I can do more for others.‎ ‎ I’ll be glad if I’m received .I am waiting for your answer.‎ Yours,‎ Wang Lin ‎8B Unit 5 知识梳理 一、重点单词 ‎1.international adj.国际的，世界的 (nation,national); ‎ ‎2.pocket n.口袋；‎ ‎3.further adv. 较远,更远 (far---farther/further---farthest/furthest); ‎ ‎4.interviewer 采访者(interview n./v.); ‎ ‎5.blindness n. 失明 （blind adj. ）;‎ ‎6.affect v. 影响 (effect n.) ; ‎ ‎7.mostly adv. 主要地,大部分地 (most);‎ ‎8.case n. 病例，案例； ‎ ‎9.cure v. 治愈； ‎ ‎10.medical adj. 医学的，医疗的 （medicine n.）; ‎ ‎11.treatment n.治疗，对待 (treat v.); ‎ ‎12.operation n. 手术 （operate v.）; ‎ ‎13.patient n. 病人， adj. 耐心的； ‎ ‎14.skill n. 技能，技巧（skillful adj.）; ‎ ‎15.afford v. 买得起, (有时间)能做; ‎ ‎16.train v. 培训，训练 (training n.);‎ ‎17.indeed adv. 真正地，确实； ‎ ‎18.proud adj. 自豪的，骄傲的（pride n.）; ‎ ‎19.improve v. 改进，改善 ； ‎ ‎20.rich adj. 富有的，丰富的；‎ ‎21.invention n. 发明物，创意（invent v., inventor n.）; ‎ ‎22. agreement n. 同意,协议 (agree v., disagree v., disgreement n.);‎ ‎23.punish v. 惩罚（punishment n.）; ‎ ‎24.ugly adj. 丑陋的；(uglier/ugliest) ‎ ‎25.volunteer n. 义务工作者，志愿者（voluntary adj.）； ‎ ‎26.war n. 战争；‎ ‎27.educate v. 教育（education n. , educational adj.）； ‎ ‎28.research n.调查，研究.‎ 二、重点短语 ‎1.pocket money 零花钱 ‎ ‎2.be used to doing sth 习惯于做某事 ‎ ‎3.used to do sth 过去常常/以前常常做某事 ‎ ‎4.the least important 最不重要的 ‎ ‎5.have an interview with sb. 采访某人 ‎6.have an effect on 对…有影响 ‎ ‎7.medical treatment 医学治疗/医疗 ‎ ‎8.a flying eye hospital 一个飞行眼科医院 ‎ ‎9.health care 医疗/保健 ‎ ‎10.a teaching centre 教学中心 ‎ ‎11.perform operations on sb= operate on sb. 给某人做手术 ‎12.be used as 被作为 ‎ ‎13.watch the operations on video 在录像上观看手术 ‎14.during my last visit 在我上一次访问期间 ‎ ‎15.such an important job 如此重要的一份工作 ‎16.be grateful to sb. for sth.=thank sb for sth 因某事而感激某人 ‎ ‎17.be proud of sth 为某事而自豪 ‎18.improve the lives of patients 改善病人的生活 ‎ ‎19.carry on withsth继续做某事 ‎20.treat sb. with kindness 仁慈地对待某人 ‎ ‎21.far away from 远离 ‎ ‎22.the long working hours 长时间工作 ‎ ‎23.the unusual lifestyle 不平常的生活方式 ‎24.the lifestyle of a flying doctor 一个飞行医生的生活方式 ‎ ‎25.develop quickly 发展迅速 ‎ ‎26.a meaningful job 一分有意义的工作 ‎ ‎27.make the world a better place 使世界成为一个更美好的地方 ‎28.make a donation 捐赠 ‎ ‎29.do some voluntary work 做一些义务工作 ‎30.fund-raising activities 募集资金的活动 ‎ ‎31.set up 成立 ‎ ‎32.finish school 学校毕业 ‎ ‎33.decide to do sth. 决定做某事 ‎ ‎34.enjoy doing sth. 喜欢做某事 ‎ ‎35.do a lot of research on… 做许多有关…的调查 ‎ ‎36.have a big meal 吃顿大餐 ‎ ‎37.try to do sth. 尽力 ‎38.treat problems 解决问题,对待问题 ‎ ‎39.so that 以便 ‎40.be afraid of 害怕…… ‎ ‎41.care about 关心 ‎ ‎42.international charities 国际慈善机构 ‎43.teaching centre 教育中心 ‎44. be proud to do sth自豪做某事 ‎45.afford to do sth 承担得起做某事 ‎46.the cases of blindness/blind cases 失明病例 三、重点句型 ‎★1. I'm not used to going out before lunch. 午餐前我不习惯外出。‎ ‎ be used to 意为“习惯于”,其中to为介词, 后接名词、代词或动名词。如：‎ ‎ Are you used to this life style? 你习惯这种生活方式吗?‎ ‎ I've lived here since I was born, I'm used to living here. 我出生以来就住在这儿，我已习惯这里的生活了。‎ ‎★2.Hobo, you used to be very kind to me. 霍波, 你以前对我很好。‎ ‎ used to 意为“过去常常，以前经常”，表示过去经常反复发生的动作或状态，现在不复存在，这种结构只有一种形式，即过去式，用于所有人称，其否定形式为used not to 或didn't use to, 这里的to后接动词原形。如：‎ ‎ I used to walk along the road after supper. 我过去常常在晚饭后沿这条马路散步。‎ ‎ He used not to like Beijing Opera, but now he's very fond of it.他过去不喜欢京剧，但现在非常喜欢。‎ ‎ I didn't use to like skating, but now I like it very much. 我以前不喜欢滑冰，但现在非常喜欢。‎ ‎ Did you use to go there? 你经常去那儿吗?‎ ‎3.We can have a big lunch afterwards. 我们随后可以吃一顿丰盛的午餐。‎ ‎ have a big lunch 意为“吃一顿丰盛的午餐”。一般来讲，表示三餐前不加冠词。如have breakfast/lunch/supper. 但当表示三餐名词前有形容词修饰时，形容词前应加不定冠词。‎ Eg. He had a quick breakfast. 他很快吃完了早餐。‎ ‎★4. I'm so weak that I can't walk further. 我身体虚弱，不能走远。‎ ‎ so…that 意为“如此……以致于……”， that后接结果状语从句。如：‎ ‎ I had so many falls that I was black and blue all over.我摔了这么多的跟头，以致于浑身青一块紫一块。‎ ‎ He was so angry that he couldn't say a word. 他十分生气，一句话也说不出来。‎ ‎ The problem is so difficult that we can't solve it. 这个问题很难，我们无法解决。‎ ‎5. During my last visit, I operated on 150 patients on the plane. 在上次访问期间，我在飞机上给150位患者动了手术。‎ operate是动词“手术”，operate on sb. 意为“给某人做手术”，operation是名词形式。如：‎ Dr Bethune operated on many Chinese soldiers. 白求恩大夫给许多中国士兵动了手术。‎ ‎6. I'm proud to be able to help so many people. 能帮助这么多的人，我感到自豪。‎ proud是形容词，意为“自豪的，骄傲的”，常用的短语be proud of 意为“为……而骄傲，因……而自豪”。如：‎ We Chinese people are all proud of Shenzhou Ⅵ. 我们中国人民都以神舟六号而自豪。‎ We are proud of Liu Xiang. 我们都为刘翔而骄傲。‎ pride是名词“骄傲，自豪”，the pride of 意为“……的骄傲”。如：‎ The Great Wall is the pride of Chinese people. 长城是中国人民的骄傲。‎ ‎7. Is there anything else you'd like to say to our readers? 你还有什么想要对我们读者说的吗?‎ anything是不定代词，意为“任何事(物)”，修饰不定代词的形容词、不定式或从句都放在其后面。如：‎ I have nothing important to tell you. 我没有什么重要的事情告诉你。‎ Is there anything interesting in today's newspaper? 今天的报纸上有什么有趣的事吗?‎ ‎— Would you like something to drink?‎ ‎— No, I'm not thirsty.‎ 你想要一些喝的吗? 不，我不渴。‎ ‎8. UNICEF is an organization that works to improve the lives of children. 联合国儿童基金会是一个致力于改善儿童生活的机构。‎ ‎(1)that works…of children 是一个定语从句，修饰名词organization, 作定语。句中lives是名词life的复数形式，与动词第三人称单数lives不同。如：‎ My grandpa lives in the countryside. 我爷爷住在乡下。‎ The lives of farmers have changed a lot. 农民们的生活已发生了巨变。‎ ‎ improve是动词，意为“改善，提高”。如：‎ If you want to improve your spoken English, you'd better practise speaking it as much as you can. 要是你想提高英语口语水平，最好尽可能多练习说英语。‎ ‎★9. Many of our patients are so poor that they can't afford to travel to hospital. 我们许多病人很穷，他们无法承担去医院的费用。 ‎ ‎（1）so…that意为“如此……以致于……”后接结果状语从句。so与that之间用形容词或副词。如：The question is so difficult that nobody can answer it. 那个问题太难，没人能回答。‎ Tom is running so fast that I can't catch up with him. 汤姆跑得很快，我赶不上他。‎ ‎ (2) afford to do sth 负担得起/买得起……‎ This kind of car is too expensive, I can’t afford it. 这种车很贵，我买不起。‎ This pair of shoes is so expensive that I can’t afford to buy it.‎ ‎★10. Dr Ma has done such an important job that people must be really grateful to him. 马医生做了一项重要的工作，人们一定对他很感激。‎ ‎ such…that与so…that同义，也是引导结果状语从句，但such与that之间用名词。如：‎ ‎ It was such a fine day that we went out for a walk. 由于天气晴朗，我们出去散步。‎ ‎ This is such an exciting match that all of us will watch it. 这是一场令人兴奋的比赛，我们所有人都会观看的。‎ ‎11. UNICEF raises money by selling Christmas cards and organizing other fund-raising activities. 联合国儿童基金会通过销售圣诞卡片以及其他筹资活动来筹集资金。‎ by 作为介词，意为“在……旁边，途经，通过，用，由”等，后接名词、代词或动名词短语作宾语。如：‎ The hospital is by the lake. 医院靠近湖边。‎ That is an engine driven by electricity. 那是一台由电力推动的机器。‎ This novel was written by Dickens. 这部小说是狄更斯写的。‎ In the old days she made a living by selling newspapers. 在旧社会她靠卖报谋生。‎ ‎★12.UNICEF believes that all children should have clean water and food so that they can be healthy. 联合国儿童基金会认为所有孩子应当享用卫生的水和食物。以便他们健康地成长。‎ ‎ (1)so that意为“以便，目的是”，用来引导目的状语从句。如：‎ ‎ He spoke very loudly so that everyone could hear him clearly.‎ ‎ 他讲话声音很大，以便大家都能听清他的话。‎ I got up very early this morning so that I could catch the early bus. 今天早晨我起得很早，为的是赶上早班车。‎ so that可以用in order to或不定式替换。如上句可变为：I got up very early in order to /to catch the early bus.‎ ‎ (2)so…that意为“如此……以致于”，用来引导结果状语从句。如：‎ The box is so heavy that I can't take it home.箱子很重，我无法搬回家。‎ so...that往往可以用too...to或enough to 来替换，因此上句可变为：‎ The box is too heavy for me to take home.或The box isn't light enough for me to take home.‎ ‎13.Curing sick people is very important. 救治病人是非常重要的。‎ Curing sick people是动名词短语，相当于名词在句中作主语，谓语动词用单数。如：‎ Looking after patients is her duty. 照看病人是她的职责。‎ Collecting stamps is my hobby. 集邮是我的爱好。‎ 动词不定式短语也可以作主语，谓语动词也用单数。如：‎ To spit in public is a bad manner. 公共场合随便吐痰是不文明行为。‎ 现代英语中通常用it作形式主语，其真正的主语往往是动词不定式。如：‎ It is very important to keep our city clean. 使我们的城市保持清洁很重要。‎ It is getting harder every day for a lazy man to make a living. 懒汉谋生日益困难了。‎ ‎14. She is used to working on a plane and is not afraid of flying any more. 她已习惯在飞机上工作了，再也不怕乘飞机了。‎ ‎(1)afraid是形容词“害怕的”，常作表语，常见的短语有be afraid和be afraid of。如：‎ I'm afraid I can't get there on time. 我恐怕不能准时来这儿。‎ She is very shy and is afraid of meeting teachers. 她很害羞，生怕碰见老师。‎ The little girl is afraid of dogs. 那小女孩害怕狗。‎ not…any more意为“不再，再也不”，与no longer以及not...any longer意义相近。如：‎ We were too tired, we couldn't walk on any more. 我们太累了，不能继续走了。‎ When I turned on the TV, the baby didn't cry any more. 当我打开电视机时，婴儿不再哭了。‎ ‎15. I think Mary really cares about other people and wants to help them. 我认为玛丽的确关心他人，并想帮助他们。‎ ‎(1)care about意为“关心”。如：‎ Lin Tao never cares about others. He is very selfish. How can you make him monitor? 林涛从不关心别人，他很自私。你们怎么选他当班长?‎ She thinks only of herself and doesn't care about her family. 她非常自私，一点也不顾她的家庭。‎ really是副词“真正地，的确”。而real是形容词，意为“真的”。如：‎ I'm really sorry for that. 对于那件事，我的确感到很抱歉。‎ Now I can skate on the real ice. 现在我能在真正的冰上溜冰了。‎ ‎(2) “think+it(形式宾语)+adj. +to do sth”意为“认为做某事是……”。‎ I think it possible for me to get the first place in my class. ‎ 我认为对于我来说获得班里第一名是可能的。‎ 四、单元写作 ‎1.能够准确写出有关慈善机构的介绍。（见课本87页，A4）;‎ ‎2.小红、小明和小刚是淮北中学的三个学生。他们根据自己的兴趣和爱好，每周花几个小时的时间参加不同的志愿者工作。根据以下要点，以“Being a volunteer is great”‎ 为题，写出他们的志愿者工作及他们的感受。60－80字左右。‎ ‎1.小红到小学帮助小学生阅读；‎ ‎2. 小明到动物医院照料动物；‎ ‎3.小刚到医院给病人演唱歌曲；‎ ‎4.参加志愿者的感受等。‎ ‎ Being a volunteer is great Huaibei Middle School is proud of three students. They are_______________________________‎ ‎_________________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎ 范文 ‎ Being a volunteer is great ‎ Huaibei Middle School is proud of three students. They are Xiaoming, Xiaohong and Xiaogang. Every week they work as volunteers at different places. Xiaohong enjoys reading, so after class she spends some time reading together with the students in a primary school. ‎ ‎ Animals are Xiaoming’s favorites, so he often goes to animal hospital. In the hospital he can not only look after the sick animals, but also learn how to treat them. Xiaogang has sweet voice, as a result, he spends much of his free time singing for the patients in the hospital. He sings songs and smile to those patients. ‎ They all think what they are doing is right. How great it is to be a volunteer!‎ ‎8B Unit 6 知识梳理 一、重点单词 blind adj.瞎的,盲的 (blindness n.); deaf adj. 聋的； ‎ disabled adj. 残疾的; elderly adj.上了年纪的 (elder,); ‎ homeless adj. 无家可归 (home); group n. 小组， v. 分组； ‎ tough adj. 困难的,费力的 (hard,difficult); ‎ within prep. 在...之内； hill n. 小山； mountain n. 高山；‎ excellent adj.极好的 （an excellent chance） chance n.机会； ‎ spirit n. 精神，灵魂； record n.& v. 记录； ‎ fitness n. 健康 （fit adj.）; aid n.帮助； ‎ first-aid adj. 急救的； airline n.航班； countryside n. 乡村，农村； ‎ gentleman n. 君子，先生 （gentlemen）; grandchild n. 孙子，孙女；‎ handwriting n. 手写，书法； headache n. 头痛； overcoat n. 外套；‎ pancake n. 烙饼，薄饼； postman n. 邮递员 (postmen);‎ toothbrush n. 牙刷； upstairs adv. 在楼上 （downstairs）;‎ rainy adj. 有雨的 （rain n.）; umbrella n. 雨伞 （an umbrella）‎ attention n. 主意，专心； lost adj. 迷路的,迷失的 （lose---lost---lost v.）;‎ wise adj.明智的，充满智慧的（wisdom n.）； perfect adj.极好的，完美的; ‎ wine n. 葡萄酒，酒；further adj更多的,更进一步的 (far,farther/further,farthest/furthest adv.).‎ 二、重点短语 ‎1.a charity walk 慈善步行 ‎ ‎2.a disabled person 残疾人,丧失能力的人 ‎3.a homeless person 无家可归的人 ‎ ‎4.an elderly person 上年纪的人 ‎5.one of the biggest fund-raising events 最大的筹款活动之一 ‎6.be known as 作为…而闻名 ‎ ‎7.be known for 因/以…而闻名 ‎8.group into a team of four 组成四人一队 ‎ ‎9.a tough hike 一场艰苦的徒步旅行 ‎10.an excellent chance 一次极好的机会 ‎ ‎11.team spirit 团队精神 ‎12.finishing time 完成时间 ‎ ‎13.keep you comfortable 使你保持舒适 ‎14.at least 至少 ‎ ‎15.support development projects 支持发展项目 ‎ ‎16.try one’s best to do sth. 尽某人最大的努力做某事 ‎ ‎17.in need 需要 ‎18.take part in 参加 ‎ ‎19.take place=happen 发生 ‎20.find two more people 再找两个人 ‎ ‎21.support teams 服务队伍 ‎ ‎22.900 metres high 900百米高 ‎ ‎23.support and help each other 相互支持和帮助 ‎ ‎24.open space 开阔的空间 ‎ ‎25.fresh air 新鲜的空气 ‎ ‎26.enjoy the beautiful view of the country 欣赏乡村美景 ‎ ‎27.pay attention to 注意 ‎ ‎28.get lost 迷路 ‎29.look down on sb. 瞧不起某人 ‎ ‎30.provide a chance to study 提供学习机会 ‎31.mobile phone 手机 ‎ ‎32.close to 靠近 ‎33.an application form 一份申请书(申请表格) ‎ ‎34.miss the chance 错过机会 ‎35.‎ 三、重点句型 ‎★1. It's meaningful to support charities. 支持慈善事业是有意义的。‎ it在句中作形式主语，其真正主语是动词不定式短语to support charities。原句可改为：To support charities is meaningful.‎ 动词不定式短语直接作主语时，往往显得“头重脚轻”，因此，现代英语中通常用it作主 语来代替。如：It's very necessary to learn a foreign language. 学好一门外语很有必要。‎ It took them three hours to finish the work. 完成这项工作，他们花了三个小时。‎ ‎★2. I don't think you will even finish your walk. 我认为你将完成不了你的步行。‎ 原句是一个含有宾语从句的复合句。当主句主语为第一人称，谓语动词是think,believe,support等词时，从句的否定形式应前移到主句中，译为汉语时仍在从句中 译出。如：I don't believe they have won the game. 我相信他们没有取得比赛的胜利。‎ I don't think he is right. 我认为他是不正确的。‎ 注意：在构成反意疑问句时，时态和人称都按从句来定。因此上述两句可改为：‎ I don't believe they have won the game, have they?‎ I don't think he is right, is he? ‎ ‎3. People over eighteen can group themselves into a team of four people and join this charity walk. ‎ 十八岁以上的人可以四人一组参加这次慈善毅行者活动。‎ group作为名词，意为“组、群、队”；作为动词，意为“组成小组、分组聚集”。如：‎ A group of children visited the museum last week. 上星期一群孩子参观了博物馆。‎ We can group our class into teams of eight students. 我们可将我们班分成多个八人小组。‎ The children grouped themselves round the hero. 孩子们围在英雄的周围。‎ ‎4. This will be an experience you will never forget. 这将是你永不忘怀的体验。‎ There will be是there be句型的一般将来时形式, 同学们对此经常会出些差错。如：‎ 误:There will have a class meeting this afternoon.‎ 正:There will be a class meeting this afternoon.今天下午将要开班会。‎ 误:There is going to hold the Olympic Games of 2008 in Beijing.‎ 正:There is going to be the Olympic Games of 2008 in Beijing.2008年在北京将要举办奥运会。‎ ‎★5. It is wrong that some people look down on blind people. 一些人看不起盲人是错误的。‎ A.“It is + 形容词+ that从句”是一个固定结构，表示对某些事情提出看法或意见。其中 it是形式主语，真正的主语是that引导的从句。that从句通常位于句末。如：‎ It is necessary that you start training a few months before the walk. 在行走活动之前几个月开始训练是很有必要的。‎ It is true that we should learn English well before we leave school. 毕业之前我们应学好英语倒是真的。‎ It is clear that Jenny did a good deed. 很显然，詹妮是做了一件好事。‎ ‎(2) look down on sb.意为“看不起某人”。与look相关的短语很多。如：‎ look forward to 指望,盼望 look sb. In the face 注视某人的脸look out 留神，当心,物色 look over 检查look through 浏览 ‎6. It is useful to have support teams. 拥有补给队是有用处的。‎ ‎(1)support作为动词，意为“支持,支撑,赞助,拥护”。如：‎ They supported a roof by pillars. 他们用柱子支撑房顶。‎ Theman supported himself with a stick. 那人用手杖支撑自己。‎ All of us should support ourselves. 我们都应自食其力。‎ support也可作名词，意为“支持,帮助”等。‎ ‎7.Thanks to the support from local businesses we succeeded. 幸亏当地工商企业的支持和帮助，我们才取得了成功。‎ ‎“It is +形容词+动词不定式”也是个固定结构，it是形式主语,动词不定式才是真正的主语。如：It is boring to walk with a dog. 牵着狗散步令人讨厌。‎ It is very interesting to walk on the moon. 在月球上行走很有趣。‎ ‎★8. It is impossible for him to finish it in ten hours. 对他来说，在十小时内完成是不可能的。‎ ‎“It is +形容词+for sb.+不定式”是一个简单句，it也是形式主语。For是介词“对于……‎ 来说，相当于”，其宾语在逻辑上是后面动词不定式的主语。这是动词不定式的复合结构。如：‎ It is hard for me to catch up with my classmates in one month. 对我来说，要在一个月内赶上同学们是很困难的。‎ It is meaningful for us to join Oxfam Trailwalker.我们参加毅行者活动是有意义的。‎ It is useless for them to waste time. 他们白白地浪费时间是没有用的。‎ 4. It is about 900 metres high and the only hill in Sunshine Town. 它约九百米高，是阳光城唯一的山。‎ About 900 metres high意为“约九百米高”，形容词high用于句末，类似的短语很多。如：‎ The Great Wall is over six thousand kilometres long. 长城有六千多公里长。‎ The huge stone is about nine tons weighty. 这块巨石约九吨重。‎ The Great Green Wall is 7,000 kilometres long, and between 400 and 1,700 kilometres wide. ‎ ‎“绿色长城”长七千公里，宽在四百到一千七百公里之间。‎ Australia is thousands of kilometres away from China. 澳大利亚距中国数千公里远。‎ 5. If we go there early in the morning, we may even hear the birds sing. 要是我们一大早去那儿，也许会听到鸟儿唱歌。‎ ‎（1）情态动词may表示可能性，意为“也许，大概，或许”。如：‎ Sorry, I haven't any books about history. Ask Lucy, she may have one. 很抱歉，我没有历史 方面的书，问问露西，也许她有一本。情态动词can,may,must都可表示可能性和推测。如：‎ She is over 90. She can fall ill at any time.她九十多岁了。说不准什么时候会病倒。‎ She may be ill. But I'm not sure. 她也许病倒了，但是我也说不准。‎ A. hear是感官动词，意为“听见，听到”，后面常接不带to的动词不定式作宾语补足语。类似的动词还有notice,see,watch,find等。如：‎ We watch our teachers play basketball after school every day. 每天放学后我们观看老师打篮球。‎ Did you see him go out? 你看到他出去了吗？‎ I find him get up very early every morning. 我发现每天早晨他起得很早。一些使役动词如make,let,have等，也接不带to的动词不定式做宾语补足语。如：‎ Now, let's have a break. 我们休息一下吧!‎ Nothing can make me turn against my homeland. 无论什么也不会让我背叛祖国。‎ ‎★11. I was waiting for Wendy when I heard some music.我正在等温迪，这时听到了一些音乐。句中when意为“就在那时,这时”,常与过去进行时连用。如：‎ I was just falling asleep when there was a loud knock at the door. 我正要入睡,这时有人大声地敲门。‎ We were enjoying our dinner when the doorbell rang. 我们正津津有味地吃饭，门铃响了。‎ We were having English when the headmaster came into the classroom. 我们在上英语课，这时校长突然走进教室。‎ ‎12. If you are interested in hiking and helping poor children, don't miss this chance. 要是你徒步 远足和帮助贫困孩子感兴趣，就不要错过这次机会。‎ A.be interested in意为“对……感兴趣”。动词hike和help都是这一短语的宾语，也可以说是介词in的宾语，应用动名词形式，常见的介词有in, about, to, with,at等。如：‎ You like swimming very much. What about skating? 你非常喜欢游泳，那么滑冰呢?‎ He is interested in collecting stamps. 他对集邮感兴趣。‎ Everyone should make a contribution to protecting the environment. 每个人都应为环境保护作出一份贡献。‎ Are you used to studying in this school? 在这所学校学习你习惯吗?‎ B. miss是动词,意为“错过,没赶上,没遇见,未击中”等,用于反意疑问句中表示肯定意义。miss 还可以作“想念,挂念”讲。如：‎ Because of the traffic jam, we missed the start of the movie.由于交通堵塞,我们没赶上看影片的开头。‎ I missed the first part of the speech. 我没听到报告的第一部分。‎ She said that she missed us very much. 她说她非常想念我们。‎ ‎13.The first ten people to finish the walk will each receive a souvenir. ‎ 最先完成这次慈善行走 的十个人,每人将获得一份纪念品。‎ 动词不定式to finish the walk作定语修饰名词people,意为“结束慈善行走的人”。如：‎ I had no time to go to the centre of the city. 我没有时间去城市中心。‎ The next train to arrive was from New York. 下一列到站的火车是从纽约开来了。‎ He was always the first to come and last to leave the office. 他总是第一个到办公室,最后一个离开。‎ 四、单元写作 ‎ 1.能完成一张流程表和一篇关于慈善活动的网页文章,能组织语言和信息,描述活动中的细节。（见课本105页A和106页B）‎ ‎ 2.话题：Huaibei School 将在六月十号下午四点举行一场SHOW FOR CHILDREN英语慈善演出。这次演出主要是为了那些穷孩子募集资金，为他们提供上学的机会。 ‎ ‎ 通过这次活动，我们也可以提高自己的英语口语。如果您对此次活动感兴趣，您可以来学校办公室申请或登陆我们的网站申请。但申请必须在五月二十之前送给我们。捐款须在演出后的一周内筹好。参加此次活动的入将获得一份纪念品。若要进一步的信息，请拨打0527-8620699与我们联系。‎ ‎ 范文： SHOW FOR CHILDREN Organized byHuaibei School ‎ The aim of “Show for Children” is to raise money for the children who are too poor to go to school . Your donations can provide children with a chance to study .‎ ‎“Show for Children” will take place at Huaibei School on 10th June at 4 p.m . We’ll have a show in English and we can improve our spoken English. If you are interested in English and helping poor children ,please come and join us .‎ ‎ You can come and get an application form in our school office . You can download in from our school website ,too . And you should return your application form by mail before 20th May .‎ ‎ You must collect all donations within a week after the show .If you join us and make a show in English , you’ll receive a souvenir .‎ ‎ For further information , please contact us on 0527-8620699.‎ ‎9A Unit 1 知识梳理 一、重点单词 divide n. 划分 similar adj. 相似的，类似的 energetic adj. 精力充沛的 （n. energy） ‎ active adj. 活跃的，积极的 （inactive）‎ patient adj. 耐心的 （impatient） ‎ leader n. 领导者 save vt. 储蓄，积攒 ‎ fair adj. 公平的，公正的 （unfair）‎ peace n. 和平，和睦，安宁 (adj. peaceful) ‎ silly adj. 傻的，愚蠢的 argue vi. 争论，辩论 ‎ mistake n. 错误，失误 humorous adj. 幽默的 (n. humour ) ‎ easy-going adj. 随和的 dream vi. vt.做梦，梦见 (dreamt-dreamt) ‎ probably adv. 大概，或许 (adj. probable)‎ explain v. 解释，说明 ballon .on n. 气球 experiment n. 实验，试验 laboratory n. 实验室 toothache n. 牙痛 dentist n. 牙医 butterfly n. 蝴蝶 clone vt. n. 克隆 awake adj. 醒着的 (v. wake) cheese n . 奶酪 lemonade n. 柠檬水 around adj. 大约 available adj. 可能的 lively adj. 活泼的，生气勃勃的 Students’Union n. 学生会 ‎ difference n . 差异，不同 （adv. differently ） ‎ mark n. 分数 二、重点短语 ‎1.bring sb sth 带给某人某物 ‎ ‎2.worry about sb/sth 担心某人/某事 ‎ ‎3.be familiar with 对……熟悉 ‎ ‎4.star sign 星座 ‎5.western culture 西方文化 ‎ ‎6.be devideded into 被分成 ‎7.at times 有时 ‎ ‎8.give up easily 轻易地放弃 ‎9.worry too much 担心太多 ‎ ‎10.be proud of 为……而骄傲 ‎11.all kinds of 各种各样 ‎ ‎12.spend……doing 花了……时间/钱做某事 ‎13.explain sth to sb 向某人解释某事 ‎ ‎14.show off 炫耀 ‎15.pay attention to doing sth 注意做某事 ‎ ‎16. have problems/trouble in doing sth 在做某事方面有麻烦 ‎17.a good sense of humour 一种幽默感 ‎ ‎18.have problems with sth 在某方面有问题 ‎19.be able to 能够 ‎ ‎20.come up with 提出，想出 ‎21.recommend …as… 推荐……作为 .‎ ‎22.Students’Union 学生会 ‎23.as…as… 象……一样 ‎ ‎24.make a speech 演讲 ‎25.do extra work 做额外工作 ‎ ‎26.get good marks 得高分 ‎27.mind doing sth 介意做某事 ‎ ‎28.worry about not doing sth 担心不去做某事 ‎29.make a speech 演讲 ‎ ‎30.forget to do sth 忘记去做某事 ‎31.a large group of people 一大群人 ‎ ‎32.get more organized 变得更有条理 ‎33.the most suitable person 最合适的人 ‎ ‎34.be afraid of doing 害怕做某事 ‎35.the 12 animal signs of Chinese culture 中国的12属相 ‎36. worry about not having breakfast 担心没有早餐吃 ‎37.at all times= always 一直，总是 ‎38. argue about sth 关于……争论 ‎39. argue with sb 与某人争论 ‎40.forgive sb for sth/doing sth 原谅某人做某事 三、重点句型 ‎1.It’s nice of you to bring me the newspaper, Hobo. 霍波，你真好给我拿来报纸。‎ It is +adj.+ of……to do sth这是强调结构，句中的是It形式主语，真正的主语是后面的动词不定式，It后面的形容词是反映人的品质、特征（如careless ,clever, foolish, good, kind ,nice, polite, selfish, silly,wrong, etc）时常用介词of.‎ It’s careless of you to forget your umbrella. 你真粗心忘记你的伞。‎ It’s nice of you to bring me the newspaper. =You are nice to bring me the newspaper. ‎ 你真好给我拿来报纸。‎ It is +adj.+ for……to do sth 这是也是强调结构，It形式主语，真正的主语是后面的动词不定式，It后面的形容词是(easy, difficult, dangerous ,important, necessary, possible, useful, etc) 常用介词for . ‎ It’s difficult for me to finish doing the paper in an hour.一小时完成这张试卷对于我很困难。‎ ‎2. A year is divided into 12different star signs.一年被分成十二个星座。‎ ‎3.You worry too much at times. 你有时担心太多了。‎ ‎4. ( spend…….(in)doing sth ) 某人花时间和金钱做某事 Mr Wu spends a lot of time expaining things to us.吴先生花了那么多时间向我解释.‎ ‎(spend……on sth)若后面跟的是名词，则不用in ，而用on 。‎ She has spent the whole week on Lesson One.‎ ‎5.sb is + adj. + enough + to do sth ‎ 常用来描述某人的个性和能力，表示“某人足够的、、、做某事”。‎ 注意当修饰形容词或副词是，必须放在他们的后面。‎ Daniel is kind enough to help his friends all the time.‎ ‎6.You will have success at school or work…‎ 丹尼尔将会在学习、工作方面获得成功。‎ ‎7.Who else would be suitable? 还有别的人合适吗？‎ ‎8.can / be able to 均可表示“能，有能力做某事”后面必须用动词原形。‎ ‎ She can dance for three hours without getting tired. 她能跳三小时舞而不感到累.‎ ‎ Peter is able to orgnize things well. 彼得能把事情组织的井井有条.‎ 区别：从意义上看，be ablel to主要表示有能力做某事，而can除此之外，还可表示“可以，可能”等，从时态来看，can只有现在时和过去时could,而be able to中的be动词可以有各种时态的变化。‎ ‎9. I’d like to recommend David as the new Chairperson of the Students’ Union.‎ ‎ 我想推荐大卫作新的学生会主席 ‎10. Because he is just as smart as my uncle.因为他正是和我叔叔一样聪明。‎ as…as 和……一样 not as (so) …as… ……不如……‎ ‎11. He would not mind doing extra work for the Students’ Union. 他不会为学生会做额外的事。‎ ‎ mind是动词，意思是“介意”，后面常用名词或动名词。‎ ‎12. Tom never forgets to do the things he needs to do. 汤姆从不忘记做他需要做的事。‎ ‎13. You should read your stars , Eddie . It’s very interesting.你应该看看你的星象，埃迪。很有意思。‎ ‎ 这里stars的意思是“星象” ，即根据人出生时天体的位置而描述的命运。‎ 如：You can read your stars on some websites.你可以在一些网站上看到你的星象。‎ ‎14. Well, you shouldn’t worry about not having breakfast then.那么，你就不用担心没有早饭吃了。‎ worry about (not) doing something “为（不）干某事而担心”‎ The dancer is always worrying about getting fat.那个舞蹈演员一直担心会发胖。‎ ‎15. Some people believe that people born under the same star sign share similar characteristics.‎ ‎ 有些人认为同一星座的人拥有相似的性格。‎ believe 后面that 引导的从句在句中作宾语，‎ 从句中的born under the same star sign是后置定语，修饰people,而share是该从句中的谓语 ‎ ‎16. Do my characteristics match what my star sign says about me?‎ ‎ 我的性格特点与星座对我的描述一致吗？‎ ‎ Match在这里用作动词，意思是“与…..相配，相一致”。如：‎ ‎ Your red tie matches your white shirt well.你的红领带与你的白衬衫很相 ‎17. Daniel is very clever, but he never shows off. 丹尼尔很聪明，但他从不炫耀。 ‎ show off. “炫耀，卖弄”。如：‎ ‎ Barry likes to show off his new car. 巴里喜欢炫耀他的新车。‎ ‎18. It’s wise of Suzy to bring balloons of all colours.苏西很明智，带来了五颜六色的气球。‎ ‎ of all colours.表示“各种颜色的”，在这里作后置定语。如：‎ ‎ That shopping center has shirts of all designs.那家购物中心有各种款式的衬衫。‎ ‎19.Daniel is kind enough to help his friends at all times.丹尼尔总是很友善地帮助他的朋友。‎ ‎ at all times“总是，随时，永远”，相当于always. 如：‎ ‎ Mr Wu is ready to help his students at all times.‎ ‎20. David is very interested in Dolly , the first cloned sheep.戴维对第一只克隆羊多利很感兴趣。‎ 这里的clone分词形式cloned用作定语，表示其后修饰的名词sheep是“被克隆的”。‎ 如：The frightened crowd 受惊吓的人群 ‎21. Then, you will have success at school or work around the middle of the month.‎ ‎ 接着你在本月中旬将会在学习或工作当中取得成功。‎ ‎ The young man had little success in finding a job.那个年轻人找工作没什么结果。‎ ‎22. More details are available on request. 更多详情备案。‎ ‎23. True, but he’s imaginative enough to come up with new ideas.‎ ‎ 确实，不过他想象力很丰富，能有各种新想法。‎ Come up with something “找到（答案）；拿出（钱等）。”如：‎ Are you able to come up with a solution to the client’s problem?‎ 你能想出一个办法来解决客户的问题吗？‎ ‎24. Since he is so hard-working, he would not mind doing extra work for the Students’ Union.‎ ‎ 既然他这么勤奋，他应该不会介意为学生会做些额外的工作。‎ ‎ Mind作动词用时，意思是“介意，在乎”主要用于疑问句或否定句。‎ 后面可以接名词或动词的-ing形式作宾语。如：‎ I hope you do not mind the mess on my desk.希望你不要介意我桌上一团糟。‎ Do you mind closing the windows?你把窗户关一下好吗？‎ 四、单元话题 ‎1. 能准确自我介绍自己或他人.（见课本P22）‎ ‎2. 范文：‎ My name is Tom. I am a secondary school student .I was born in May,1990 in Yang cheng. My star sign is Taurus. It says people under this star sign are patient. Actually I am really patient and don’t give up easily. I am also very helpful. I always do extra work in class. At school, I always help other students with their studies. I am good at organizing many after-classes activities. I am also a clever person. I am good at Computer and English. I always get good marks in tests.‎ I think I can be a good monitor. Will you please give me a chance?‎ ‎9A Unit 2 知识梳理 一、重点单词 pink n . adj 粉红色（的） rainbow n . 彩虹 mood n . 心情，情绪 sleepy adj. 欲睡的，困倦的 （v. sleep）‎ relaxed adj. 放松的，不拘束的，悠闲的 (v. relax)‎ sadness n . 悲哀，忧伤 (adj. sad ) calm adj. n .平静（的） ‎ satisfied adj.满意的，满足的 (v. satisfy)‎ prefer vt. vi. 宁愿选择，更喜欢 heat n . 热 difficulty n . 困难，费力 (adj. difficult) decision n . 决定 (v. decide)‎ deep adj. adv. 深的，深厚的 (n. depth ; adv. deeply)‎ worried adj. 担心的，烦恼的 (v. worry) influence vt. 影响 requir vt. 需要，要求 unhappiness n . 忧愁，不悦 diary n . 日记 behaviour n . 行为，举止 e-card n . 电子卡片 discover vt. 发现，发觉 promise vt. n . 允诺，答应 successfully adv. n .有效成功地，成功地 college n . 大学，学院 oil n . 油 dark adj. 黑色的 (n. darkness) skin n . 皮，皮肤 pale adj. 苍白的 free adj. 免费的 Perhaps adv. 或许，可能 thought n . 想法，看法，注意 handbag n . 女用皮包，手提包 二、重点短语 ‎1.would rather…than… 宁愿做某事 ‎2.nothing wrong 没什么错的 ‎3.look good on you 穿在你身上很好看 ‎ ‎4.look good in red 穿红色很好看 ‎5.in the sky 在空中 ‎ ‎6.change one’s moods 改变某人的心情 ‎7.prefer to do sth =would rather do sth 宁愿做某事 ‎ ‎8.cheer up 高兴起来 ‎9.remind sb of 使某人想起某事 ‎ ‎10.take action 采取措施 ‎11.make a decision 下定决心 ‎ ‎12.be in a bad mood 处于坏心情 ‎ ‎13.keep doing sth 一直做某事 ‎ ‎14.make phone calls to 打电话给 ‎15.make sure 确保，确信 ‎ ‎16.think of 考虑 ‎17.give sb some advice 给某人一些建议 ‎18.what to wear 穿什么 ‎ ‎19.look more powerful 看起来很有力量 ‎20.a little bit stressed 有一点压力，焦虑 ‎ ‎21.a good match 好搭配 ‎22.be on holiday 在度假 ‎ ‎23.something strange 奇怪的事 ‎24.just like 就象 ‎ ‎25.show sth to sb 把某物展示给某人看 ‎26.put …on one’s home page 把……放在网页上 ‎ ‎27.affect our moods 影响我们的心情 ‎28.create a feeling of harmony 产生一种和谐感 ‎29.be good for our mind and our body 对我们的大脑和身体有好处 ‎30.the colour of wisdom 智慧之色 ‎ ‎31.the yellow stationery 黄色的文具 ‎32.in need of 在……的需求中 ‎ ‎33.in a bad mood 处于一种坏的心情 ‎34.make sb +adj. 使某人处于某种状态 ‎35.make sb. do sth 让某人做某事 ‎36.would rather do A than do B=prefer doing A to doing B 宁愿做A事也不做B事 ‎37.‎ 三、重点句型 ‎1.would rather do sth than do sth (接动词原形) 比较某事而言更喜欢做某事 ‎ I’d rather wear blue than pink. ‎ ‎2.I’ve just seen a rainbow in the sky. 我刚在看见空中有一道彩虹。‎ ‎3.Wearing red makes it easier for you to take action. 穿红色使你很容易采取行动。‎ ‎4.People who live in cold climates prefer to use warm colours to give their homes a warm and comfortable feel.‎ 住在冷气候中的人们更喜欢用暖色给家带来一种温暖、舒适的感觉。‎ ‎ prefer to do sth…‎ I prefer to have coffee. ‎ prefer doing…to doing…‎ I prefer reading to writing.‎ prefer sth to sth （接名词） ‎ I prefer blue to red.‎ ‎5.Which do you prefer ,walking or jogging?‎ 你更喜欢步行还是慢跑?‎ ‎6.My brother prefers reading to writing.=My brother would rather read than write.‎ 比较写作而言,我的哥哥更喜欢读书.‎ ‎7.This can help when you are having difficulty making a decision.‎ 当你做决定有困难时起作用。‎ ‎8.hope/wish 相同：都可接动词不定式做宾语如I hope /wish to go to Shanghai.‎ 区别：hope可接双宾语和复合宾语，wish而不能。 We wish you a happy new year.‎ wish表示愿望时从句用虚拟语气。 I wish I could fly.‎ ‎9.We promise you success, or you will get your money back. 我们承诺你成功，否则你可把钱拿回。‎ ‎10.Why don’t you wear this red shirt?=Why not wear this red shirt?‎ ‎=How about wearing this red shirt?=What about wearing this red shirt?‎ ‎=Shall we wear this red shirt?‎ ‎11 That’s why she is wearing red.那正是穿红色的原因。‎ ‎ Put on, wear, on, i n, dress。都可以表示穿。 ‎ ‎ Put on your coat, it’s cold outside.穿上你的外套，外面很冷。‎ ‎ You should wear red clothes if you need physical strengh. 如果你需要体力， 你应该穿红色衣服。‎ ‎ The princess always went to the party on a red skirt.公主总是穿着一件红色的短裙去参加聚会。‎ The mother dressed her son quickly and took him to school.‎ 妈妈很快给儿子穿好衣服，就带他去上学了。‎ Put on 表示“穿上，戴上”，强调穿的动作；‎ wear表示“穿着，戴着”，强调穿的状态时，还可以用介词in, on 表示。‎ On 指衣服穿在某人身上，in 指某人穿着某衣服。这与on和 in本身的意思是一致的，但不应把in 和on 当成动词来用，他们都是介词。‎ ‎ dress作名词，指“衣服，连衣裙”，还可做动词，如: dress sb表示“给某人穿衣服”它是个及物动词，可以直接跟宾语，但是它的宾语“人”，而不是“衣服”，如：表示“给某人穿衣服”。另外，dress up (as) 表示“乔装打扮成”。‎ ‎12. There’s nothing wrong with pink.‎ ‎ 粉红色没什么不好。‎ ‎13．But blue looks good on somebody ‎ 可你穿蓝色很好看。（Somebody） look good in（ something ）“”“某物穿在某人身上很好看”‎ ‎（ something ）look good on（Somebody）“某人穿某物很好看 ‎ Red looks good on Kitty. 红色穿在基缔身上很好看 Kitty looks good in red. 基缔穿红色很好看。‎ ‎14. Colours can change our moods and make us feel happy or sad, energetic of sleepy.‎ ‎ 颜色能够改变我们的心情，使我们感觉快乐或悲伤、精力充沛或昏昏欲睡。‎ ‎15. This report explains what colours can do and what characteristics they represent.‎ ‎ 这份报告阐明了颜色能起什么作用以及它们代表什么样的性格特征。‎ 句中what colours can do和 what characteristics they represent并列作explains的宾语 ‎16. Have you ever walked into a room and felt relaxed ?‎ ‎ 你是否曾经走进一个屋子并感觉十分放松呢？‎ ‎ Ever意思是“曾经，在任何时候”，通常用于一般疑问句和否定句。如“‎ Have you ever seen such a tall tree ?你曾经见过这么高的树吗？‎ The old man hardly ever left his house. 那位老人几乎没离开过他的屋子。‎ ‎17. Wearing blue clothes or sleeping in a blue room is good for our mind and body because this colour create a feeling of harmony ‎ ‎ 穿蓝色的衣服或待在蓝色的屋子里对身心都有好处，因为蓝色能营造一种和谐的感觉。‎ Wearing blue clothes和sleeping in a blue room 都是动词- ing形式，在句中充当主语。如：‎ Trying to keep your worries to yourself can make them worse.试图掩饰焦虑不让别人知道会使情况更糟糕。‎ ‎18. Orange represents joy. It can bring you success and cheer you up when you are feeling sad.‎ 桔色代表快乐。它能带给你成功，并能在你感到悲伤的时候使你振奋起来。‎ Hard work can bring you success.努力工作能带给你成功。‎ Cheer somebody up “使……振奋起来” ‎ My teddy bear always cheers me up when I feel blue.我郁闷时，我的玩具熊总能让我开心。‎ ‎19. This can help when you are having difficulty making a decision.‎ 当你犹豫不决的时候，红色能帮你拿定主意。‎ Have difficulty (in) doing something “做某事有困难”。如：‎ I have great difficulty (in)learning English grammar.我学英语语法挺费劲。‎ ‎20. We promise to help you successfully change your moods, or you will get your money back.‎ ‎ 我们保证可以帮助你成功地改变你的情绪，否则如数退款。这里的or表示“否则，不然。”如：‎ Focus more on your study, or you will let your parents down.‎ 多专注于学习吧，否则会让你父母失望的。‎ ‎21. Red and white are a good match, as the powerful red balances the calm white.‎ ‎ 红与白是相宜的搭配，因为热烈的红可以平衡宁静的白。‎ ‎22. You’re right! He does look like MrWu.你说得对，他看起来确实很像吴老师。Does在这里起强调作用。如：Daniel does like playing computer games.丹尼尔的确喜欢玩电脑游戏。‎ ‎23. none指没有人或没有东西时，在句中可做主语或宾语，谓语动词可用单数，也可用复数。‎ none指在一定范围内，代替上下文已出现过的名词。与on one的区别是，‎ no one一般用来指人，等于nobody,no one和nobody使用时不受一定范围限制，后面不接of引导的介词短语。‎ ‎24.Anyone, any one, anybody的区别：anyong=anybody指任何人，不指物，后可接of引导的介词短语。‎ ‎25. Everyone, every one, everything的用法区别是：everyone只指人，every one指人也可指物，只有every one可以跟of引导的介词短语。‎ 四、写作 ‎1. 能准确用颜色描述人的服装及心情.见课本P39‎ ‎2．范文 I know that colour can change our moods and make us feel happy or sad, energetic or sleepy . For example, blue is one of the colours which make us feel calm and peaceful . When you walk into a room and felt relaxed , it could be because the walls were painted blue. Wearing blue clothes or sleeping in a blue room is good for the mind and body. Another calm colour is ‎ white .And if you are feeling stressed ,you should wear white. White is also the colour of purity . Many women like to be in white on their wedding day. ‎ Orange and yellow are warm colours. They can give you a happy and satisfied feeling. People living in cold climates prefer to use these colours in their homes to create warm and comfortable feeling there. Orange represents joy and it can bring you success and cheer you up.‎ ‎9 A Unit 3 知识梳理 一、重点单词：‎ ‎1. mad adj. 发疯的，生气的 ‎ ‎2.disturb vt. 打扰，扰乱 disturbed adj.‎ ‎3.communication n. 交流，交际 communicate v. ‎ ‎4.deal vi. 对付，处理 dealt(过去式)‎ ‎5.choice n. 选择 choose v. 6.complete vt. 完成 ‎7.refuse vi. vt. 拒绝，不愿 8.accept vt. 接受 ‎ ‎9. hardly adv. 几乎不 10.spare adj. 空闲的，多余的 vt. 留出，匀出 ‎11ping-pong n. =table tennis 乒乓球运动 12. doubt vt. n. 怀疑 ‎13. whether conj. 是否 =if 14. worth adj. 值得 ‎15.offer vt. 主动提出，提供，n. 主动提议，减价 ‎16.suggestion n. 建议 suggest v.‎ ‎17. value n. 用途，积极作用，价值 valuable adj. 宝贵的，很有用的，贵重的 ‎18.plenty n. 大量，充足 19.allow vt. 允许 ‎20. strict adj. 严格的，严厉的 ‎ ‎21. achieve vt. 获得 achievement n.‎ ‎22. task n. 任务，工作 23. either adv. pron. （否）也，二者之一 ‎24. courage n. 勇气 25.truth n. 事实，真理 true adj.‎ ‎26. notice vt. 注意，察觉 27. progress n. 进步 ‎28.youth worker 青少年辅导员 29.reply vi. n. 答复，回答 ‎30.pleasure n. 高兴，乐意 please v. pleased adj. pleasing adj.‎ ‎31. spelling n. 拼写 spell v. 32.suffer vi. （因疾病，磨难等）受苦，受难 ‎33. though conj. 虽然，尽管 34. cause n. 原因 二、重点短语 ‎1. get fat 发胖 ‎ ‎2. feel tired 感到累 ‎ ‎3. feel lonely 感到孤独 ‎ ‎4.drive me mad 把我逼疯 ‎ ‎5.deal with 处理 ‎ ‎6. stay up late 熬夜 ‎7. hand in上交 ‎ ‎8.on time 及时 ‎ ‎9.hear from 收到…的来信 ‎ ‎10.be of great value有极大的价值 ‎ ‎11.be crazy about 对…着迷 ‎ ‎12.plenty of 大量的，许多 ‎13.stay out late 在外迟 ‎ ‎14.from time to time 有时，不时的 ‎ ‎15.allow sb to do sth 允许 ‎ ‎16.achieve a balance between …and 在…和…之间达到平衡 ‎17.get/take a bus上公车 ‎ ‎18.get/become angry 生气 ‎ ‎19.get/achieve a high mark 得高分 ‎ ‎20.get /have a lot of homework有许多作业 ‎ ‎21.get/arrive home late 到家迟 ‎ ‎22.get/receive a letter收到一封信 ‎23.a lot of traffic交通拥挤 ‎ ‎24.revise for tests为了测试复习 ‎25.tell ab the truth实话相告 ‎ ‎26.quarrel with与…争吵 ‎27.spare some time for sb匀一些时间给… ‎ ‎28.care only about marks只关心成绩 ‎ ‎29.the top student尖子生 ‎ ‎30.share your problems with sb和…分担你的烦恼 ‎31.pay no attention to不在意… ‎ ‎32.laugh at嘲笑 ‎ ‎33.be proud of为…自豪 ‎ ‎34.reply to 给…回复 ‎35.suffer from stress 承受着压力 ‎ ‎36.make a list of 列出…的目录 ‎37.shout at对…大叫 ‎ ‎38.keep quiet 保持安静 ‎ ‎39.feel bad about sth对…感到伤心 ‎ ‎40.keep your worries to yourself把忧伤留给自己 ‎41.make me laugh 让我笑 ‎42.all day 整天 ‎ ‎43.have close friends有亲密的朋友 ‎ ‎44.be on开着、进行着 ‎ ‎45.give sb advice on sth在某方面给某人建议 ‎46.feel bad about感觉……不好 ‎ ‎47.offer sb sth/offer sth. to sb向某人提供某物 ‎ ‎48.offer to do sth.主动愿意做某事 ‎ ‎49.be strict with sb对某人严格 ‎ ‎50.feel stressed 感到有压力的 ‎ ‎51.have sb’s support 得到某人的支持 ‎ ‎52.wish sb to do sth希望某人做某事 ‎ ‎53.succeed in doing sth 成功地做某事 ‎ ‎54.stop doing sth停止做某事 ‎ ‎55.stop to do sth停下来做另一件事 ‎ ‎56.an hour or two一、两个小时 ‎ ‎57.mark the tests 阅卷 ‎ ‎58.write to sb给某人写信 ‎ ‎59.for a while一会儿 ‎60.be good at擅长、善于 ‎ ‎61.be weak in在……方面差 ‎62.try one’s best （to do sth）尽某人最大的努力（做某事）‎ ‎63.thank sb for doing sth感谢某人做某事 ‎ ‎64.ask sb for advice 向某人征询意见 ‎65.ask sb for help.先某人求助 ‎ ‎66.Why don’t you do sth?你为什么不做某事呢？‎ ‎67.Why not do sth? 为什么不做某事呢？ ‎ ‎68.cause of stress 产生压力的原因 三、重点句子及句型：‎ ‎1.It’s unhealthy for you to eat too much. 对于你吃太多是不健康的。‎ It’s +adj.+for sb +to do sth.‎ ‎2.I have a lot of homework every day and I have no choice but to do it.‎ 每天我都有大量的家庭作业要做，我除了完成这些些练习，没有其他选择。‎ have no choice but to do sth 没有选择只能做……‎ ‎3.Sometimes, I want to refuse to do so much work, but usually I just accept it.‎ 有时，我想拒绝去做如此多的作业，但我通常还是接受了。refuse to do 拒绝去做 ‎4.I hardly have any spare time for my hobbies such as playing volleyball and ping-pong.‎ 我几乎没有时间顾及我的业余爱好，比如打排球，乒乓球。have spare time for有时间做……‎ ‎5.I often doubt whether it is worth working so hard.我常常怀疑这样努力学习是否值得。‎ be worth doing sth值得做。。。‎ ‎6.Can you offer me some suggestions?你能提供一些建议给我吗？‎ ‎▲offer 用作动词，意为“提供；”“为……提供机会，给予”常用短语“offer sb. sth或offer sth. for sb.”意思是“为某人提供某物”。如：‎ I offered him a glass of wine.我敬了他一杯酒。‎ offer to do sth.的意思是“主动提出做某事。”如：‎ She offered to carry the box for her mother. 她主动提出要帮她母亲拿箱子。‎ I hope to hear from you soon.我希望快点收到你的来信。‎ hear from收到…来信 ‎7.My dream is to be a great football player.我的梦想是成为一名伟大的足球运动员。动词不定式做表语 ‎8.I believe it is important for us to spend some time on your hobbies.我相信花费一些时间在我们的爱好上是很更要的。It’s +adj.+for sb +to do sth.‎ ‎9.Can you please advise me how to achieve a balance between schoolwork and my hobbies?‎ 你能提供建议告诉我怎样在作业和爱好之间达到平衡吗？achieve a balance between …and…. 在…和…之间达到平衡 ‎10.Linda came back home to find her house on fire.淋达回家后发现她的房子着火了。动词不定式做结果状语 ‎11.Paul knows who to talk to for help.保罗知道对谁谈话求助。引导词+动词不定式 ‎12.Simon does not know what to do.西蒙不知道去做什么。引导词+动词不定式 ‎13.You should decide which to do first.你应该决定先做哪个。引导词+动词不定式 ‎14.Sandy wants to know where to ask for ‎ advice.桑迪想知道到哪里去咨询意见。引导词+动词不定式 ‎15.Millie does not know how to solve her problem.米莉不知道怎样去解决她的问题。引导词+动词不定式 ‎16.I’m afraid she doesn’t want to write to me any more.恐怕她不再想给我写信了。not …any more 不再 15. I’m sure that’s not sure.我相信事情不是这样的。‎ 16. Why don’t you send an e-card to her and let her know you miss her very much?‎ 你为什么吧给她发送一张电子贺卡，让她知道你非常想念她呢？‎ Why don’t you do sth? 你为什么不做某事呢？‎ 17. My pleasure. 我很乐意这样做。‎ 四．单元话题：‎ 没有时间做自己喜欢的事，只能放弃自己的爱好 作业太多似乎永远也做不完 父母不理解，有时甚至吵架 得不到休息，疲惫不堪，每天恹恹欲睡 你的建议或解决方案,相信他很快会快乐起来 吉姆是你的好朋友，最近他心情很烦躁。请你根据下图和文字提示，写一篇80字左右的短文，列举出吉姆所面临的问题，同时给出你的建议或解决方案（至少两条）。文章的开头已给出，不计入总词数。‎ Jim is my best friend. He is unhappy these days. ________________________________________‎ ‎______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎ Jim is my best friend. He is unhappy these days. He has too much homework every day. It seems that he can never finish it. He has little time to do the things he like to do. He has given up his hobbies. He thinks his patents don’t understand him. Sometimes he even quarrels with his parents. He can’t have a good rest and he is sleepy all day. I think he should plan his day carefully. He should try to make friends with his parents and he can also ask his teachers for help. I believe ‎ he will be happy again soon.‎ ‎9A Unit 4 知识梳理 一、重点词和词组:‎ 36. far adv. 很，极，大 ， farther （比较级）更远 ， farthest （最高级）最远 37. weekly adj. 每一周的 4.up-to-date n. 最新的，现代的 ‎ ‎5.latest adj.最新的 ，最近的 6.cover vt. 报道，电视报道 ‎7.live adv. adj. 现场直播（的）,实况转播（的） 8.coming adj. 即将来临的 ‎9.Asian adj. 亚洲的，亚洲人的 n.　亚洲人 Asia n. 亚洲 ‎10.text n.　　文本，正文 11.message n.　消息，音信 ‎12.concert n.　音乐会 13.direct v. 导演，指导 director n.导演 ‎14.face vt.　 面临，面对　　 15.disapper vi. 消失 ‎16.act n. 行为，举动 17.prize n. 奖赏，奖品 ‎18.ice skating n. 滑冰 19.right adv. 立即，马上 ‎20.end vi. 结束 ending n. 结局，结尾 21.race n. 赛跑 ‎22.friendship n. 友谊 23.spaceman n. 宇航员 ‎24.habit n. 习惯，习性 25.rather adv. 相当 ‎ ‎26.background n. 背景 27. website n. 网站 ‎28.surprising adj. 令人惊讶的 surprised adj. 感到惊讶的 二、重点短语 ‎1.far too busy to do sth.太忙了，有能做某事 ‎ ‎2.have nothing to do无事可做 ‎3.have a little sleep小睡一会儿 ‎ ‎4.from 9 to 12从9点到12点 ‎5.between 2 and 7 在2点到7点之间 ‎ ‎6.send out发送 ‎7.make TV programmes制作电视节目 ‎ ‎8.control…from a distance遥控 ‎9.your least favourite programme 你最不喜欢的节目 ‎10.a weekly round-up一周综述 ‎11.up-to-date information最新信息 ‎ ‎12.cover different sports包括不同的体育活动 ‎13.such as例如 ‎ ‎14.a bit boring 有一点无聊 ‎15.a number of许多 ‎ ‎16.the number of ……的数量 ‎17.interview with sb. / have an interview with sb.采访某人 ‎18.the coming World Cup即将来临的世界杯 ‎ ‎19.cover live实况转播 ‎20.attend the presentation 出席颁奖仪式 ‎ ‎21.this coming Saturday本周六 ‎22.two thousand fans .两千歌迷 ‎ ‎23.thousands of fans数千歌迷 ‎ ‎24.vote online for sb.在网上投票给某人 ‎ ‎25.announce the results 宣布结果 ‎26.write down your answers 写下你的答案 ‎ ‎27.send text messages to发送信息到 ‎28.free concert tickets免费的音乐会票 ‎ ‎29.a horror film directed by由…某人执导的恐怖片 ‎30.be found + adj. 被发现…… ‎ ‎31.kill oneself自杀 ‎32.find out the answer to the question 找出问题的答案 ‎ ‎33.not…until 直到……才 ‎34.be full of 充满 ‎ ‎35.get scared 害怕，恐惧 ‎36.solve mysteries 解开谜团 ‎ ‎37.a one-hour documentary 一个小时的纪录片 ‎38.take a close look at 关注，细看，观察 ‎ ‎39.the Asian tiger亚洲虎 ‎40.face the danger 面对危险 ‎ ‎41.be killed for因为…而被杀 ‎42.an animal lover 动物爱好者 ‎ ‎43.in India在印度 ‎44.see scenes of India欣赏印度风光 ‎ ‎45.between…and…在两者之间 ‎46.in the natural habitat 在自然栖息地，野生环境中 ‎ ‎47.win an award for因……而获奖 ‎48.take part in参加 ‎ ‎49.mind doing sth.介意做某事 ‎50.learn a lot about学到很多有关……的知识 ‎ ‎51.real life event生活中的真实事件 ‎52.win a great price获大奖 ‎ ‎53.chat show 谈话节目 ‎54.game show竞赛节目 ‎ ‎55.drama series电视连续剧 ‎56.Weather Report 天气预报 ‎ ‎57.News Round-up 新闻综述 ‎58.take a shower洗澡 ‎ ‎59.right after English News 刚好在英语新闻之后 ‎60.walk past / pass the book shop走过书店 ‎ ‎61.put away 把……收好 ‎62.come first得第一名 ‎ ‎63.sit in front of the TV坐在电视前 ‎64.prepare for sth. / get ready for sth为^准 ‎65.prepare to do sth / get ready to do sth准备做某事 ‎66.before / after doing sth.在做某事之前/之后 ‎ ‎67.programmes on/about animals动物类节目 ‎68.a member of …的成员 ‎ ‎69.the rest of其余的 ‎70.disagree all the time 一直意见不合 ‎ ‎71.argue abou为……而争吵 ‎72.get angry with each other互相生对方的气 ‎ ‎73.throw … onto the ground把……扔在地上 ‎74.the remote control遥控器 ‎ ‎75.a twin daughter and a twin son 双胞胎兄妹／姐弟 ‎76.at work在工作 ‎ ‎77.such an exciting day 如此令人激动的一天 ‎78.the writing competition作文竞赛 ‎ ‎79.the whole month整个一个月，一整月 ‎80.work on 致力于，从事某方面的工作 ‎ ‎81.think of想到 ‎82.surprising ending令人意外的结局 三、重点句子及句型：‎ ‎1.I’m far too busy to go shopping. 我太忙了而不能去购物。‎ too… to…太…不能…far 在这里起强调作用，表示“很，非常”‎ e.g. She is far too tired to walk on.‎ ‎2.If you are not a football fan, you might find this week’s programme a bit boring.‎ 如果你不是足球迷，你可能发现这个星期的节目有点令人讨厌的。‎ ‎3 As you are watching the show ,write down your answers and send text messages to 1396. 当你正在看演出时，把答案写下来发短信到本世纪末1396。send text messages to 1396发短信到 ‎4.A doctor is found dead in his house. 一个医生被发现死在家里了。be found + adj. 被发现……‎ ‎5．I did not believe it until I saw our names on the website.直到看到我们的名字在网站上，我才相信它。‎ ‎6.It is you who made our story so perfect. 使我们的故事如此完美的人就是你。‎ ‎“It is …who/that… ”是常用的强调句结构 e.g. It is my mother who cooks supper for us every day. 是妈妈每天为我们做晚饭。‎ It was he who played games the whole night. 是他整个晚上都在玩游戏。‎ It is in the park that Jack met your sister yesterday. 昨天杰克是在公园遇到你姐姐的。‎ ‎7. This one-hour documentary takes a close look at the Asian Tiger. ‎ 这部长一小时的记录片让我们近距离地领略亚洲虎。take a close look at …近距离地看…‎ ‎8. You can see scenes of India, one of the few places on earth. Where tigers still live. ‎ 你可以领略印度风光，这里是世界上老虎仍然生存的几个地方之一。‎ on Earth =in the world 世界上 e.g. You are the happiest man on earth. on earth 还可以表示“究竟，到底”‎ e.g. Where on earth can he be? What on earth do you mean?‎ ‎9. It will be a good show to watch. 这将是一场好看的比赛。‎ to watch 动词不定式，在句中做定语修饰show。‎ e.g. Tom didn’t know which book to buy. Can I have something to drink?‎ ‎10. I don’t mind feeling scared. 我不在乎恐惧。‎ mind v. 介意，反对， 后跟doing sth. 多用于句型：‎ Would you mind … / Do you mind …? 表示征求意见 e.g. Do you mind my smoking / Do you mind if I smoke? mind 作为名词，表示“大脑、精神” ‎ e.g. Wearing blue is good for the mind and body.‎ He has made up his mind to be a teacher.‎ There are always famous people on these shows talking about their lives.‎ ‎ (访谈)节目里总是有名人谈他们的生活。这是一个there be 结构的句子，注意句中的talking, 不能用talk原形。‎ e.g. There is a fire burning in the fireplace. 壁炉里炉火正在燃烧。There is a bird flying in the sky.‎ ‎11. She is more interested in watching programmes about animals. 她对观看动物节目更感兴趣。‎ be more interested in doing sth. 对做某事更感兴趣。‎ ‎12. Usually, she spends about two hours every day watching TV. 通常她每天花大约2小时的时间看电视。‎ ‎13. He finds programmes about sports boring. 他发现体育节目无聊。这是宾补结构的句子， find sth + adj.做宾补e.g. I find English difficult.‎ ‎14.the two children disagree all the time 两个孩子一直意见不合disagree vi. 不同意，有分歧。 反义词是agree disagree with sb. / sth. 与某人意见不一致/不同意某事 e.g. I disagree with you on that point. 我在那一点上与你意见不一致。‎ ‎ I disagree with your suggestion. 我不同意你的建议。‎ ‎15. the two children argued about what TV programmes to watch 两个孩子争论该看什么电视节目 argue with sb. about sth. 为某事与某人争论/争吵 e.g. He argued with me about how to spend the money yesterday. 昨天他就怎样花这笔钱和我争论。‎ ‎16. Today is such an exciting day! 今天真是令人兴奋!an exciting day 令人兴奋的日子exciting, adj. 令人兴奋的，主语是某件事情excited, adj. 使人感到兴奋的，主语是人 e.g. I am excited about the exciting news. 我对这个令人兴奋的消息感到兴奋。‎ such adj. 后接名词 so adv. 后接形容词或副词 上句也可写成：Today is so exciting a day!‎ 看下面两个句子：She is such a good teacher that everyone likes her.‎ She is so good a teacher that everyone likes her.‎ ‎17. A weekly round-up of what is happening in sport, with lots of up-to-date information.‎ 综述一周体育事件，为你提供大量的最新体坛动态。weekly 每周一次的 e.g. a weekly magazine They are doing the weekly cleaning.‎ ‎ up-to-date 最新的， 其反义词是out of date.e.g. The book is up-to-date.‎ ‎ This ticket is out of date.‎ ‎18. There are also a number of interviews with the famous football players. 还有许多对著名球员的采访。‎ a number of “许多，大量”，修饰可数名词的复数形式，相当于many，动词用复数。‎ e.g. A number of students are playing on the playground.‎ the number of …的数量， 动词用单数。‎ e.g. The number of students in our class is 42.‎ Now the number of the traffic accidents is increasing.‎ ‎19.This year’s Beijing Music Awards will be covered live. 本年度北京音乐颁奖大会将进行实况转播。‎ will be covered live 将来时的被动语态。‎ 一般将来时的被动结构是： will be + v. ed.e.g. The meeting will be held tomorrow.‎ ‎20.. Murder in a Country House is a horror film directed by Cindy Clark, a new director.‎ ‎《乡村小屋谋杀案》是一位由新导演辛迪·克拉客导演的恐怖片。directed by… 是过去分词短语做定语，修饰film。‎ 四．单元话题： ‎ ‎ 我最喜欢的电视节目 请谈谈你所知道的电视节目， 并说出你最喜欢的电视节目和你最不喜欢的电视节目以及原因， 以及你花多少时间在看电视上。 ‎ 可参考的课时：welcome, vocabulary, speak up 重点句子:‎ ‎ There are many different types/ kinds of TV programmes, such as…‎ ‎ My favourite TV programme is…‎ ‎ My least favourite programme is…‎ ‎ I like programmes about animals best/least. I find them interesting/boring.‎ ‎ I like watching documentaries because I learn a lot about nature, history and real-life events from them.‎ ‎ I prefer game shows. I hope one day I can take part in one of them , answer all the questions and win a great prize.‎ ‎ I like comedies because the actors in them are always very funny and they make me laugh.‎ ‎ I like watching chat shows because there are always famous people on these shows talking about their lives.‎ ‎ I don’t like drama series because they are too long and I don’t have time to sit in front of the TV for hours.‎ ‎ I don’t like programmes about sports because they are boring.‎ ‎ I watch TV for about one hour every day/ week.‎ ‎ I spend one hour watching TV every day/ week.‎ ‎9A Unit 5 知识梳理 一．重点词汇:‎ ‎1．四会词汇:‎ daydream v. 白日做梦 realistic adj. 现实的,实事求是的 ‎ effort n. 努力 enter v. 进入 industry n. 工业,产业 French adj. 法国(人)的,法语的/n.法语 insist v. 坚持/坚持认为 immediately adv. 立即，马上 lifetime n. 终身，一生 well-known adj. 著名的，众所周知的 throughout prep. 遍及,贯穿 beyond prep. 超越 devote v. 献身，致力于,把……用于 honour v. 给予表扬(或奖励等) /n. 荣誉，奖励 present v. 颁发,授予 aloud adv. 出生地,大声地 cowboy n. 牛仔 breath n. 呼吸 popcorn n. 爆米花 soft drink 不含酒精的饮料 review n./v. (书刊、电影等的) 评论; 复习 tale n. 故事，传说 anyway adv. 无论如何 consider v. 认为，考虑 ‎2．词型变换:‎ attract v. 吸引 → attractive adj. 有吸引力的 ‎ achieve v. 获得 → achievement n. 成就,成绩 peace n. 和平 → peaceful adj. 宁静的,和平的 → peacefully adv. 宁静的，和平的 talent n. 天赋,才干 → talented adj. 有才能的 ‎ experience n. 经验，经历 → experienced adj. 富有经验的 silent adj. 寂静的，沉默的 → silence n. 寂静,沉默 ‎ affect v. 影响 → effect n. 影响 act v. 行为,举动 → actor n. 男演员 → actress n. 女演员 ‎ lose v. 丢失，失去 → loss n. 失去 beauty n. 美貌,美人 → beautiful adj. 美丽的，漂亮的 ‎ appear v. 出现 → appearance n. 外貌,样子;亮相 suit n. → suitable adj. 合适的 二.重点短语:‎ ‎1.stop daydreaming 停止白日做梦 ‎ ‎2.be more realistic 更现实点 ‎3.not only… but also… 不但 …… 而且 …… ‎ ‎4.the loss of… ……的失去 ‎ ‎5.at a very young age 在很小的时候 ‎ ‎6.put one’s effort into 将某人的心血倾注在……‎ ‎7.the film industry 电影业 ‎ ‎8.attract one’s attention 吸引某人的注意 ‎9.be made into a play 被改编成剧本 ‎10.mark the beginning of … 标志着……的开始 ‎11.play the lead role 扮演主角 of 扮演……的角色 ‎12.play the role in 在……中扮演角色 ‎13.shortly after 不久以后 ‎ ‎14.be chosen to do sth. 被选来做……‎ ‎15.a big success 巨大的成功 ‎ ‎16.during one’s lifetime 在某人的一生中 ‎ ‎17.make one’s final appearance in one’s last film 某人的息影之作 ‎18.throughout one’s acting years 在某人的演艺生涯中 ‎19.by showing us the beauty of nature 通过向我们展示自然界之美 ‎20.win/earn an Oscar for Best Actress 赢得奥斯卡最佳女演员奖 ‎21.go beyond 超越 ‎ ‎22.not just… but also… 不但……而且……‎ ‎23.devote… to + sth./doing sth. 将……奉献给 ‎24.the last few years of her life 在她生命的最后几年 ‎25.work closely with 与……密切合作 ‎26.be honoured/presented with… 被授予 ……‎ ‎27.the Presidential Medal of Freedom 总统自由勋章 ‎28.take her last walk 最后一次散步 ‎29.at the age of 在多大年龄 ‎ ‎30.pass away 去世 ‎31.in her sleep 在睡梦中 ‎ ‎32.insist on 坚持 ‎33.the right person 合适的人选 ‎ ‎34.base on 以……为基础 ‎35.action film 动作片 ‎ ‎36.horror film 恐怖片 ‎37.romantic film 浪漫片 ‎ ‎38.science fiction film 科幻片 ‎39.out of breath 气喘吁吁 ‎40.the first one to arrive at the cinema 第一个到电影院的人 ‎41.get some drinks 买饮料 ‎ ‎42.wait for 等待……‎ ‎43.a lot /very much 非常 ‎ ‎44.on time 按时;准时 ‎45.the film review电影评论 ‎46.bring …alive on screen 将…生动地呈现在银幕上 ‎47.be suitable for 适合… ‎ ‎48.fall in love with 与某人相爱 ‎49.something terrible 恐怖的事 ‎ ‎50.a special offer/price 特价 ‎51.have an effect on 对……有影响 ‎ ‎52.be considered as 被看作是……‎ ‎53.a talented actress 一个有天赋的演员 ‎ ‎54.acting skills 演技 ‎55.be excited about/at +sth./doing sth. 对……感到兴奋 ‎56.the one-and-a-half-hour film 一个半小时的电影 ‎57.be about to do sth. =be going to do sth. 打算做…… ‎ ‎58.a film festival 电影节 ‎59.each of them 他们中的每个人 三．重点语句:‎ ‎1. I’m too good for TV. I should be in Hollywood instead.我太棒了,不适合在电视上发展，我应该在好莱坞。‎ too…to 结构往往具有否定意义。与此相似, too…for 结构也具有否定意义，意为 “太…… 而不适合”。例如：He is too fat for the clothes . = He is too fat to wear the clothes ‎2. She is famous not only in the USA, but also in other parts of the world.‎ not only…but also… 意为 “不仅…… 而且…… 、既……又……”。在句中用来连接两个相同成分，可以是主语、宾语、表语或状语等。例如：He can play not only the piano but also the violin.‎ ‎3. By showing us the beauty of nature, Hepburn wanted to remind us that we should protect the nvironment.‎ ‎1）by doing sth. 意思是 “通过做某事”。例如；‎ By helping each other, the students have improved their grades. 通过互相帮助，学生们提高了学习成绩。‎ ‎2）remind sb. that … 是动词 remind 的常用结构，意思“提醒某人去做某事”。 例如：‎ Mrs Bell reminded her son that he had to go to the shop after school.‎ 贝尔太太提醒她的儿子放学后必须去商店。‎ remind sb. of （使某人想起……） 和 remind sb. to do sth.（提醒某人做某事）也是动词remind 的常用结构。例如；‎ This photo reminds me of my childhood. 这张照片使我想起了我的童年。‎ Be sure to remind him to water the flowers. 一定要提醒他浇花。‎ ‎4. …a play based on her novel.‎ base … on 表示“把……建立在……基础上”；be based on 是起被动结构，意思是“以……为基础”。这里的based on 是过去分词短语作后置定语，修饰名词play。例如：‎ He based his reports on the facts. 他的报告是以事实为基础的。‎ The progress of the society is based on harmony. 社会的进步是以和谐为基础的。‎ ‎5. She had put most of her effort into ballet training before she entered the film industry.‎ She had also been a model before she became a Hollywood superstar.‎ 过去完成是由“助动词had +过去分词”构成，主要表示过去某一时间或某一动作之前已发生的动作或存在的状态，也就是我们常说的“过去的过去”。通常情况下， 我们只有把时态置于一定的语言情景中。才能学得活、学得深刻。在含有由 when, before ,after连词引导的主从复合句中，如果主从句的谓语动词表示的过去动作是在不同的时间发生的，那么先发生的动作可用过去完成时，后发生的动作用一般过去时。‎ ‎6. While acting in Monte Carle Baby, Hepburn met the famous French writer Colette.‎ While doing sth. = while sb. is/was doing sth. 意思是 “当做…… 时”, when/before/after也有此用法。‎ ‎7. Colette insisted that Hepburn was the perfect girl to play the lead role in the play.‎ 科莱特坚持认为赫本是出演这部戏的最佳人选。‎ ‎8. She was honoured with a number of awards because of her efforts in this area.‎ 她因在该领域(帮助贫苦儿童)做出的努力而多次获奖。‎ honour 在这里用做作动词，表示“给予表扬（或奖励、头衔、称号）”。honour也可用作名词，表示“（为表扬某人的）奖励、头衔、荣誉称号”。如：‎ I was happy to win this wonderful honour. 我很高兴能获得此项殊荣。‎ ‎9. Hepburn’s achievements went beyond the film industry.赫本取得的成就不仅仅是在电影业。‎ ‎10. We should protect the environment.‎ You ought to read more to improve your English.‎ You had better finish your homework before you watch TV.‎ You have to tell your parents before you go out.‎ You must buy a ticket to go into the cinema.‎ Why not go to the cinema today?‎ Why don’t you stop daydreaming?‎ Perhaps people should remember Audrey Hepburn not only as a great actress but also as a great humanitarian.‎ 我们可用“应该（should， ought to），最好（had better）”向朋友提建议。根据具体情况也会用“必须（must），只好（have to）”向别人提出一些事件的想法。其中，should，ought to， had better，语气较委婉；have to和must语气较强。也可用Why not，Why don’t you, perhaps表达建议。‎ ‎11. What do you think about fights in action films?‎ What do you think about/of…? 常用来询问对方对某人或某物的看法，也可用 How do you like/find…?来替换。‎ ‎12.They have a bad effect on people, especially teenagers. 它们对人们有不良影响，尤其是青少年。‎ ‎13.Her dream was to become a successful ballet dancer. 她的梦想是成为一名成功的芭蕾舞演员。‎ 四．话题作文：‎ 假设你叫Katie，是位电影迷，更是央视电影频道的忠实观众。请根据提示给该栏目的主持人Lisa写一封英文信，并表达你对这个栏目的良好祝愿。‎ 提示：电影题材非常丰富，有卡通、爱情、科幻等，可以放松心情，有利于了解历史、外国文化，开阔眼界等等。但有时插播的广告时间过长令人感到不快。希望能有所改进。‎ 要求：1. 语句通顺、合乎逻辑。‎ ‎2. 80词左右（信的开头和结尾已给出，不计入总词数）。‎ Dear Lisa,‎ ‎____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎ Sincerely yours,‎ ‎ Katie 范文：‎ Dear Lisa,‎ ‎ I like your program very much.‎ ‎ In your program , I can watch cartoons, romantic films ,science fiction and so on. All of them are fun and can help me relax myself when I an tired.‎ ‎ For so many years, the films have helped me know about the history and foreign cultures ,broaden my mind and so on. They have really helped me learn lots of useful things.‎ ‎ However, sometimes some ads last for a very long time. This really makes me feel uncomfortable .I’m looking forward to seeing the improvement.‎ ‎ Best wishes for you and your and your program.‎ Sincerely yours, ‎ Katie ‎9A Unit 6知识梳理 一．重点词汇:‎ ‎1.四会词汇:‎ detective n. 侦探,警探 murderer n. 杀人犯,凶手 ‎ suspect n.嫌疑犯 /v. 怀疑 occupation n. 职业,技术 salesman n. 售货员,推销员 medium adj.. 中等的 doorway n. 门口，出入口 somewhere adv. 在某处 death n. 死，死亡 bright adj. 聪明的 engineer n. 工程师 add v. 补充，增加 fingerprint n. 指纹 enemy n. 敌人，仇人，反对者 several adj./pron.. 几个 suppose v. 推断，料想 breathe v. 呼吸 heavily adv. 沉重地,猛烈地 blood n. 血 prove v. 证明 against prep. 反对，违反，紧靠 law n. 法律 gun n. 枪 reward n. 报酬，奖金 confirm v. 证实,确认 crime n. 犯罪，罪行 particularly adv. 特别，尤其 bleed v. 流血 struggle n./v. 搏斗，斗争 ‎ obviously adv. 明显地 attacker n. 攻击者 well-paid adj. 收入高的guilty adj. 有罪的 charge v. 指控，控告 system n. 系统 theft n. 行窃,盗窃案 thief n. 窃贼,小偷 dare v. 敢于，胆敢 risk n. 危险，风险 safety n. 安全，保险 if conj. 是否 queue n. 行列，长队 familiar adj. 熟悉的 ‎ record v./n. 记录 prison n. 监狱 criminal n. 罪犯/adj. 犯罪的,犯法的 object v. 反对/n. 物品，东西,宾语 ‎ progress v./n. 进步 boss n. 老板，上司 ‎2.词型变换:‎ murder v./n. 谋杀 → murderer n. 谋杀者，凶手 ‎ bleed bled bled ‎ attack v. 攻击 → attacker n. 攻击者 ‎ break broke broken ‎ breath n. 呼吸 → breathe v. 呼吸 ‎ heavy adj. → heavily adv.‎ thief → thieves (pl.) ‎ safe adj. 安全的 → safety n. 安全→ safely adj. 安全地 rob 抢劫 robbed robbed ‎ kidnap 绑架,劫持 kidnapped kidnapped ‎ kidnapping n. 绑架 kidnapper n. 绑架者 ‎ die v. 死,死亡 → death n. 死,死亡 → dead adj. 死亡的 二.重点短语:‎ ‎1.be dressed like /as 打扮成…… ‎ ‎2.do some very important work 做重要的工作 ‎3.much more serious 严重的多 ‎ ‎4.go missing 不见了的 ‎ ‎5.make notes on 做……的笔记 ‎ ‎6.medium height 中等身材 ‎7.be most likely to be最有可能成为 ‎ ‎8.be wanted for murder 因谋杀而受到通缉 ‎9.the body of ……的尸体 ‎ ‎10.in the doorway of a clothes shop 在一家服装店的门口 ‎11.at the scene of the crime 在案发现场 ‎ ‎12.somewhere else 其他某个地方 ‎13.anything unusual 不同寻常的事 ‎ ‎14.the top detective 探长 ‎15.be attacked with a knife 被刀攻击 ‎ ‎16.bleed to death 失血过多而亡 ‎17.as a result 结果 ‎ ‎18.evidence of a struggle 搏斗的痕迹 ‎19.put up a good fight 进行了激烈的搏斗 ‎ ‎20.the death of ……的死 ‎ ‎21.check the scene for fingerprints and other clues 查看现场提取指纹和其它一些线索 ‎22.be guilty of 犯……罪 ‎ ‎23.be charged with sth./doing sth. 被指控…… ‎ ‎24.break into 闯入 ‎ ‎25.computer systems 电脑系统 ‎26.over the last year 在过去的一年中 ‎ ‎27.made him some enemies 使他树敌 ‎ ‎28.so far 迄今为止 ‎ ‎29.breathe healthily 喘着粗气 ‎30.have evidence to prove 有证据证明 ‎ ‎31.at another place 在另一个地方 ‎32.at the time of the crime 在案发时间 ‎ ‎33.offer a reward of 悬赏……钱 ‎34.lead to 导致;有助与 ‎ ‎35.contact sb. on 打……(电话号码)联系某人 ‎ ‎36.do something against the law 做违法的事 ‎ ‎37.a man with blood on his shirt 一个衬衫上有血的人 ‎ ‎38.a strange man 一个陌生人 ‎ ‎39.in a blue van 在一辆兰色货车里 ‎ ‎40.notice sb. doing sth. 注意到某人在做某事 ‎ ‎41.dare to do sth. 敢做某事 ‎42.a risk of getting killed 遇害的危险 ‎ ‎43.catch the murderer 抓住凶手 ‎ ‎44.put up 张贴;挂起 ‎ ‎45.a drawing of the suspect 嫌疑犯的画像 ‎ ‎46.say thanks for me. 带我说声谢谢 ‎47.get out of the shower 洗完澡 ‎ ‎48.wait in the queue 排队 ‎ ‎49.at the bank 在银行 ‎ ‎50.hear a gunshot 听到枪声 ‎51.hold a gun 握着枪 ‎ ‎52.wear a mask 戴面具 ‎ ‎53.in his mid-thirties 他三十多岁 ‎ ‎54.be familiar with 与……熟悉 ‎55.have no criminal record 没有犯罪记录 ‎ ‎56.in prison for theft 因偷窃而坐牢 ‎ ‎57.sometime between 7 and 8 在7点到8点的某个时间 ‎58.on the morning of 在……的上午 ‎ ‎59.at his sister’s wedding 在他姐姐的婚礼上 ‎60.be involved in this case 与此案有关 ‎ ‎61.an increase in sales 销售额的增长 ‎ ‎62.keep a record of 对……做记录 ‎ ‎63.see sb. doing sth. 看到某人在做某事 ‎64.the next day 第二天 ‎ ‎65.a diamond necklace一条钻石项链 ‎ ‎66.get along/on with sb. 与某人相处 ‎ ‎67.live next door 住在隔壁 ‎ ‎68.be able to do sth. 能够做某事 ‎ ‎69.just then 就在这时 ‎70.a jewellery shop 一家珠宝店 ‎ ‎71.be under arrest for murder 因谋杀而被捕 ‎72.call the police 报警 ‎73.report him to the police 向警方告发他 ‎ ‎74.not … at all 一点也不 ‎75.catch a bus 赶上公交车 ‎ ‎76.come home from work 下班回家 三．重点语句:‎ ‎1.My food has gone missing.missing是形容词,意思是 “找不到的”或 “失踪的”等。 例如： ‎ The child has been missing for three days.这孩子失踪三天了。‎ ‎2. It is possible that there was more than one attacker. ‎ 此句是“从句”句型，其中是形式主语，从句才是真正的主语。另外，也是的常用句型。例如：‎ It’s possible that we’ll be a little late.我们可能会晚一点儿到。‎ Is it possible for us to get to the airport before five?我们五点钟之前赶到机场，可能吗？‎ ‎3. My cousin noticed a man running down Upper Street last night.‎ notice sb. doing sth.意思是“注意到某人正在做某事”，强调所注意的动作正在进行。例如：‎ Did you notice his hand shaking?你有没有注意到他的手在抖？‎ notice sb. do sth.的意思是“注意某人做了某事”。例如：‎ We noticed him cross the street, but he didn’t notice us.我们注意到他过马路了，可他没注意我们。‎ ‎4.Sun Bank was robbed of one million yuan .‎ rob表示“抢劫、抢夺”， “rob+遭抢的人或地方（+of+被盗物）”是常用结构。本句be robbed of…是其被动式。例如：The robbers bobbed the bank of millions of dollars.强盗抢了银行数百万每元。‎ ‎5.Tom got along with all of his neighbours except the man who lived next door.‎ get along/on with sb.是“和某人相处”的意思，在get along/on 后可以加副词，表示相处得任何。例如：She doesn’t know how to get along with her parents.她不知道怎样和父母相处。‎ who lived next door是定语从句，修饰the man 。例如：‎ The girl who you met last week is our monitor.上周你遇到的那位女孩是我们的班长。‎ He said he was going to visit his parents.‎ Detective Lu said that the victim was attacked with a knife and bled to death as a result.‎ Detective Lu added that the police are now checking the scene for fingerprints and other clues. ‎ A witness reported that he was breathing heavily and had blood on his shirt.‎ The policeman asked where the body was.‎ I asked if/whether he knew the body was.‎ Mr Wu said (that) the sun rises in the east.‎ 直接引语任何变间接引语：‎ ‎（一）如何变时态：‎ 直接引语变为间接引语时，如主句中的谓语动词时态是一般现在时或一般将来时，则间接引语的时态保持不变。‎ 如主句中的谓语动词时态是一般过去时，从句的时态需要进行相应的调整，即一般现在时→一般过去时；现在进行时→过去进行时；一般过去时→过去完成时；现在完成时→‎ 过去完成时。‎ ‎（二）如何变时间和地点状语：‎ now →then ；today→ that day；tonight → that night；this morning/week →that morning/week；tomorrow →the following day/the next day；yesterday→the day before；last month→the month before ；ago→before；here→there；‎ ‎（三）如何变引导词：‎ ‎1直接引语如果是陈述句，间接引语应改为由that引导的宾语从句。‎ ‎2直接引语如果是一般疑问句，间接引语应改为由if/whether引导的宾语从句。‎ ‎3直接引语如果是特殊疑问句，间接引语应改为由wh-词引导的宾语从句。‎ ‎（四）如何变语序：‎ 直接引语变为间接引语时，要将原直接引语中的一般疑问句和特殊疑问句中的疑问语序改为陈述语序。‎ ‎（五）如何变句型：‎ 直接引语如果是祈使句，间接引语应改为“tell（ask,order等）sb. (not) to do sth.句型。‎ ‎6. I don’t think Wang Gang is involved in this case.我认为王刚与此案无关。‎ 此句是一个否定前移的句子，当主语是第一人称I/we时，主句的谓语动词为think、believe 、suppose等，从句的否定应前移到主句中。‎ 四．话题作文：‎ 昨晚8点到10点之间，在滨海市发生了一起谋杀案，一个男孩在公园门口被杀。请根据下面表格内容提示，对该起谋杀案进行简要叙述，要求语言简洁，流畅，不少于80词。‎ Victim a boy ‎5 years old, about 1 metre tall wear a red T-shirt, blue shorts, and a brown ‎ jacket Suspects a postman Know the boy’s father Don’t know the boy At his sister’s wedding yesterday evening a cook Know the boy and his father Went to their house that afternoon left the house at 8p.m.‎ 范文：‎ There was a murder case between 8p.m. and 10p.m. yesterday in Binhai City. A boy was murdered in the doorway of the park. He is five years old and about one metre tall. He was wearing a red T-shirt, blue shouts and a brown jacket. The police have arrested two suspects. One is a postman. He knows the boy’s father, but he doesn’t know the boy. He was at his sister’s wedding yesterday evening. The other suspect is a cook. He knows the boy and the boy’s father. He went ot their house that afternoon and left the house at 8p.m.‎